ï»¿odel PKâ€”88
Advanced Electromc Apphcatlons. Inc Packet Controuef
l$L\
ADVANCED ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS, INC.
Model PK-88
Packet Controller
OPERATING MANUAL

OPERATING MANUAL
MODEL PK-88 PACKET CONTROLLER
ADVANCED ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS, INC.
Rev. D 3/90
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
Reproduction, dissemination or use of information contained herein for
purposes other than operation and/or maintenance is prohibited without
written authorization from Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.

Getting Started with the PX-B8
Congratulations and thank you for your purchase of the AEA
PK-88 Packet Data Controller. The following is intended to
help get you started and "on the air" with the PKâ€”B8 quickly and
easily.
The PKâ€”88 Operating Manual is filled with complete information
on all commands and operating modes. This doesn't mean you have
to read it cover to cover before using your PK-88. Most of the
information you will need to connect your computer or terminal
and radio to the PKâ€”88 can be found in Chapter 2 of the PKâ€”88
Operating Manual.
If you are using one of our programs such as PCâ€”Pakratt or PK-FAX
for the IBMâ€”PC and compatibles, COMâ€”PAKRATT for the Commodore 64
and 128 or MacRATT for the Macintosh, then you should start with
the Installation section of the Program manual. After you have
the program installed and running on your computer, then Chapter
2 of the PKâ€”88 Operating Manual will describe how to connect the
PKâ€”88 to your computer and transceiver.
AEA's programs such as PCâ€”Pakratt simplify the way you enter
commands to the PKâ€”88. This means that some of the sections of
the PK-88 Manual that tell you to enter a command in a certain
manner will not apply. when using one of our programs on your
computer, sections 2.5, 2.6 and 2.7 of the manual can be
skipped.
In general, if you are using one of AEAâ€™s programs such as
PCâ€”Pakratt, PKâ€”FAX, COMâ€”PAKRATT, or MacRATT, the manual that
comes with the program should answer most questions. The PKâ€”88
Operating Manual should only be needed as a reference when
specific Hardware or Command information is sought.
On the other hand, if you are using a Dedicated Terminal or
Terminal Program on your computer, you should carefully follow
the setâ€”up procedure outlined in all of Chapter 2 of the PKâ€”88
Operating Manual. Sections 2.11 and 2.12 of the Manual describe
how to connect the PKâ€”88 to several different kinds of computers
which may be especially helpful.
You will not need any of this information to get your PKâ€”88 up
and running, but you may want to skim through the Addendum for
the latest information on the PKâ€”88 operating firmware.
NOTE TO PCâ€”Pakratt USERS:
In order to run the PKâ€”88 with PC-Pakratt, your PCâ€”Pakratt
disk must contain a file PCPAKRAB7.CFG. Contact ABA at
206-775-7373 if you have any questions.

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PREFACE
PREFACE T0 THE PK~B8 PACKET CONTROLLER MANUAL
Please read this preface in its entirety. lt contains information about how
to receive warranty service, the current software installed in your PK-88, our
software update policy and how to get involved in the digital radio community.
RF Interference Information To User
This PK-88 has been certified under Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules.
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy. If it is not in-
stalled and used properly, that is, in strict accordance with AEA's instruc-
tions, it may cause interference to radio and TV reception. It has been type-
tested and has been found to comply with the limits of a Class B computing
device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of the
FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip-
ment does cause interference to radio or IV reception. which can be determined
by turning the PKÂ»88 on and off. the user is encouraged to try and correct
the interference using one or more of the following measures:
0 Reorient the antenna of the device receiving interference.
0 Relocate the computer with respect to this device.
o Plug the computer into a different outlet so the computer and the
device are on different branch circuits.
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for additional suggestions. The user may find â€˜How to Identify and
Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems,â€˜ a booklet prepared by the FCC, help-
ful.
PLEASE USE SHIELDED CABLE FOR ALL RS-232 CONNECTIONS
As part of our continuing program of product improvement, we reserve the right
to make changes in this product's specifications. Changes will be made peri-
odically to the information in this document. These changes will be incorpor-
ated in new issues of this manual.
There may be technical inaccuracies or typographical errors in this document.
Please address comments and corrections to AEA Incorporated. PO Box C2160,
Lynnwood, WA 98036-0918. ABA reserves the right to incorporate and issue any
information thus supplied in whatever manner it deems suitable without incur>
ring any obligations whatever.
FIRST ISSUE (HAY 1988)
Copyright Advanced Electronic Applications, lnc., 1986, 1987, 1988. All
rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced or used in any form
or by any means without prior written permission from the copyright owner.
1 PK88-3

PK-83 OPERATING MANUAL PREFACE
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of another fine ABA product.
PLEASE COMPLETE AND RETURN the Warranty Registration Card packed with your
PK-88 system.
WE WILL NOT BE ABLE TO FURNISH YOU WITH ANY UPDATES TO THE SOFTWARE IF YOU DO
NOT RETURN THE ABOVE DOCUMENT. AS NEW FEATURES ARE DEVELOPED, WE ARE SURE YOU
WILL WANT TO BE ABLE TO OBTAIN THEM.
If you call for any kind of customer assistance, we will ask for the serial
number on your warranty card. Because of the numerous situations in which our
product is used by an unauthorized third party, we MUST verify that you are
the licensed user. We may choose to call you at the phone number listed in
our records to verify your identity. THANK YOU for your patience.
Product Update Policy
From time to time we will make available updates to the design of our prodÂ»
ucts. These sometimes are made available to the user who has previously pur-
chased its products. We can only tell you about these updates if we have your
warranty card. PLEASE SEND IT IN If you have not already done so. Future
versions of software for the PK-BB will most likely become available. We will
make these updates available, if possible.
lg Qggg gj Trouble
Application and troubleshooting assistance may be had by calling AEA during
our 8-12, 1-h:30 working hours in Seattle WA. Ask for the Customer Service
Department. The phone number is (206) 775-7373. Please have your product
serial number, and version date of the software available. The version date
is on the first screen that comes up when you turn on the PK-88. We will also
need to know the nature of any other equipment connected to the PK-88.
Please attempt to solve problems locally or ask an AEA dealer. Substituting a
PK-80, PK-87, PK-232 or other TNC that you know is working properly for your
questionable one is a diagnostic technique that will check out the rest of
your station. Also try running your PK-88 in another station.
Many of the AEA products that are sent to us for repair are in perfectly good
order when we receive them. Please perform whatever steps are applicable from
the information on installation and troubleshooting.
If you call for assistance, please have your PK-88 configured and operating
near the phone. Our service technician may ask you to perform certain key-
board routines to aid in diagnosis. If you have a voltmeter handy, you might
have the PK-88 open so you can report measurements to the service technician.
PLEASE DO NOT RETURN THE PK-88 TO US WITHOUT FIRST CONTACTING US FOR PERMIS-
SION. WE WOULD LIKE THE OPPORTUNITY TO TROUBLESHOOT THE PROBLEM OVER THE
PHONE FIRST, SAVING YOU BOTH TIME AND MONEY.
ii PK88-b

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL PREFACE
If you return the PK-88 to us by United Parcel Service or other freight car-
riers, the PK-88 must be sent to our street address not to our post office
box number. Our street address is:
AEA. Inc.
2006 196th St. sw
Lynnwood, WA 98036
USA
We will need YOUR street address for proper return shipment. Be sure to in-
clude your shipping or mailing address.
For domestic customers, United Parcel Service Surface (Brown Label) takes 7-8
days; Blue takes 2-3 days and Red is an expensive overnight service. Send the
PK-88 in a way that it can be traced if we cannot verify receipt of shipment.
We suggest United Parcel Service, Federal Express or insured postal shipment.
If the PK-88 is still under the original owner's warranty, AEA will pay the
cost of the return shipment. The current policy is that it will be returned
UPS Brown if received Brown or by US Mail; returned UPS Blue if received Blue
or by overnight service; or returned as the owner states in his letter if he
furnishes the return cost for the method he selects.
If the PK-88 is out of warranty, it will be returned by UPS Brown COD unless:
l) It was received UPS Blue/Red in which case it will go back UPS Blue COD, or
2) If you designate billing to VISA or MASTERCARD, or 3) you enclose a BLANK
personal check endorsed â€˜not to exceed ...$,â€˜ or 4) you specify some other
method of return.
We will typically service the product in two or three days if we have all the
facts. It may take longer if we must call you. PLEASE, if you send it in,
include a letter stating the problem and where you can be reached. If you can
be reached by phone in the evening on the East Coast, let us know where. Our
current rate for out-of-warranty service is $50/hour with a 3/4 hour minimum.
Parts and shipping are extra.
AEA is not responsible for damage such as caused by lightning, nonprofessional
alterations, poor storage/handling, etc.
Should your warranty card not be on file at AEA, you need to send the proof of
purchase date to receive warranty service. Typically a copy of your bill of
sale from an AEA dealer will suffice.
The warranty is for the original owner only and is not transferable.
m PK88-5

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PREFACE
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the exciting world of digital Amateur Radio! You've joined the
ranks of the fastest growing mode in Amateur Radio since the FM repeater.
Your AEA PK-88 Packet Controller is the connection between your computer and
radio. The PK-B8 performs all the â€˜magicâ€™ of establishing data and text com-
munications between your station, as well as many other communication fac-
ilities equipped for digital communications.
With packet radio you'll have a â€˜private channelâ€˜ while sharing a frequency
with other packet stations; you'll be able to â€˜read the mailâ€˜ from other pack-
et stations, log on to computer-based 'bulletin boardâ€˜ or â€˜mailboxâ€™ systems,
handle message traffic - in short, you're now equipped to enjoy the advantages
of digital communications and error-correcting radio techniques in your ham
shack.
Your new AEA PK-88 is the heart of your digital radio station. The PK-83's
system software is derived from the original TAPR TNC; it presents many of the
advanced features of that design, coupled with significant enhancements based
on the experience gained by thousands of TAPR-equipped amateur packet stations
worldwide.
This manual is your guide into the realm of Amateur Packet Radio.
Join 5 Packet Club ; Subscribe lg Newsletters ; Join a Voice Net
Join a packet radio club - they exist in all states as of this writing. You
might also subscribe to the ARRL publication â€˜Gateway,' which describes all
the â€˜goings onâ€˜ in packet radio, and to the TAPR â€˜Packet Status Register,â€˜
which describes the technically interesting happenings in the movement. There
are many voice nets on VHF and HF; they usually meet weekly. They are usually
dedicated to making the newcomer feel at home.
Acknowledgment
AEA, Inc. gratefully acknowledges the Tucson Amateur Packet Radio Corporation,
Tucson, AZ, for permission to include excerpts from their TNC-2 documentation
in this manual, and to Mike Chepponis and Phil Karn for their specifications
for the KISS code.
Norm Sternberg (WZJUP) and Barbara Argilo developed, wrote and edited this
Operating Manual on Tandy l000SX computers with IBM's Displaywrite 3 V1.1 pro-
gram.
Our special thanks to Mike Lamb (N7ML), Dr. Alan Chandler (K6RFK), John Gates
(N7BTI), Steve Stuart (NGIA), Andy Madsen (KB7B), Joe Schimmel (WZHPM), Jeff
Jacobsen (WA7MBL), Hank Oredsen (WORLI), Brian Riley (KAZBQE), Phil Karn
(KA9Q) and Mike Chepponis (K3MC) for their help.
AEA, Inc. dedicates itself to the advancement of digital radio communications.
iv PKB8-6

PK- B8 OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
Paragraph
9-4v-lb-It-lb-It-â€˜P-ltdÂ»-4Â»-l>â€”*|-I>â€”'|â€”*
kï¬‚l-*&~II\>I\)I\>Nll\>lQI\Â§9â€”'râ€”'r-â€˜t-1
o~<.nL\w~>- w~1-
Introduction. .
. . Scope.......
. General. . . .
Application. . . .
. Specifications. . . . . . . . ..
Description. . . . . . . . . . .
. . Modem Characteristics. .. .
. Processor System . . . . .
. . .
Input/Output Connections. . .
. Controls and Indicators.
.. General . . . . . .

. System Components. A . . . . . , ..
Input/Output Devices. . . . . ..
CHAPTER 2 Â» INSTALLATION
mmmmmrummmmmnwrurommmmmmmmwmnovonmw
\D\D~b~O\O~D\D~Â§\Ow(zm@@\IOv0\Oâ€™\O\0\U\Lâ€˜\ANI~>r~>h>r-'râ€”*|â€”*
0n\:o\v\L\u~r- >wv\>r- L~w~vâ€”- wr~:>- ma-Â¢
. Preliminary lnformation.... . . . . . .
.. . . . . . . .
..
Equipment Required....
. . Precautions.......... .
. Installation . . . .

Power Connecrinns....... . . . .
......
. Radio Input and Output Connections.... . . . . . .
..
. Computer Connections..., . . . , . .
....
. Controls and Indicators....
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
......
. Serial Port Configuration....
Screen Displays....................
. Echoes . . . . . . .
.......... . . . .
......
. Line Feeds and Carriage Returns....
. ScreenWidth........... . . . .

Display Speeds...............
System Setup and Verification. . . . . ..
Radio Connections and Setup . . . . . . . .
..
. PTT (Push~to~Talk) Configuration..
. Data Carrier Detect (DCD Pin 8) Jumper JP6. . . .
. PM Installation and Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. SS8 Installation and Adjustment..,.
. Command List Displays . . . . . . . . .
......
Display Complete Command List....... . . . . . . . . .
H
Display Partial Command Lists . . . . . .
... , . . . . . . . .
..
. Display Asynchronous Port Parameters...
. Display Special Characters . . . . . . . . .
... , . . .
H
Display Identification Parameters. . . . . . .
. .
Display Link Parameters . . . .
. . . . . . . .
Display Monitor Parameters.......
. Display Timing Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
TOC<1
System Transmitter/Receiver Performance Requirements.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
age
r-'râ€”\|-*râ€”*>â€”4r-lr-Ir-In-|â€”'l-ir-4r-'r*
llll ~ -1-|
L\>1>\.-zwwmrorxvror-IÂ»-1Â»-Ir-I
wwwromrowmmmrommmnnwnmmmw
Â»||| -<- - ... <-
>-r-*~oo=ov\|u|L\L-s\J>&\wo-|wv\>wr-Â»-Â»â€”Â»>-*Â»--
râ€”-
 is
2-lb
2â€”lb
2-lb
2-15
2>l5
2-16
... 2-16
... 2-17
PK88-7

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATION (Continued)
Paragraph
2.10 Immediate Commands . . . . .
........ . . . . . .
......
2.10.1 Unlisted Commands........... . . . . . . .
......
2.11 Detailed Connections for Specific Computers.....
2.11.1 Computers with Specific Serial Interfaces....
2.11.2 Commodore 64, 6hC, 128, Vic 20 . . . . . . . . . .
...
2.11.3 IBM PCjr . . . . . . . . . . . .
........... . . . . . .
........... . . . . . .
.
2.11.b Tandy Co1or Computer.......... . . . . . . .
..............
2.11.5 Tandy Model 100/102, Kyocera KC-85 and NEC 8201 . . . . . . .
..
2.11.6 Other Computers with 25-pin RS-232â€”C Ports........ . . . .
..
2.11.7 Other Computers with Non-standard Serial Ports....
2.12 Terminal (Modem) Software for Specific Computers...
2.12.1 Apple Macintosh................................
2.12.2 Apple 11, 11+, 115 and nc........
2.12.3 Commodore 6b, 646, 128. Vic 20....
2.12.4 IBMPC_jr... . . . .

2.12.5 Tandy Color Computer........ . . . . . .
.................
2.12.6 Tandy Model 100/102, Kyocera KC-85 and NEC 82Ol.........
2.12.7 IBM PCS, â€˜Clonesâ€™ and True Compatibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
2.13 PBBS, Electronic Mail and File Server Program Compatibi1ity.....
2 13.1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
CHAPTER 3 - BASIC OPERATION
wwwuuwwwwwwwwwwwwwww
wmwbbvewwwwwwwwwmwmw
umÂ»- \:a\uvL~w|\>|-- umÂ»-I
Exploring the PK-88 Program . . . . . . . . . .
......... . . . . . . . . .
H
. LED Status and Mode Indicators.......
. Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
. . The DCD LED - Data Carrier Detect....
LEDs at System Start . . . . . . . . . . . . .
... . . . . . . . . .
.
Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
Entering Commands...
Command Responses...
Error Messages.....
Command Names............ .......
. Default Values........... . . . .
.....
Parameters, Arguments and Values....
. Using Commands Without Arguments....
Controller Messages......... . . . .
.....
. General Messages......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
. Command Mode Error Messages.... . . . . . .
..
. Link Status Messages . . . . . .
..u
. Special Keyboard Control Codes.... . . . . . .
..
. Clear String CommandS.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
Detailed Command Descriptions.... . . . . . . . . .
..
Page
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-22
uwuwwwuuwwuwuwwuuuuu
-1 I >. .||-.1 . I
r-'>â€”â€˜v-on~1o\0\o\&\;>w\.-:|or~:vu>-r-|-|-Â»-
000
TOC-2 PK88-8

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 - BASIC OPERATION (Continued)
Paragraph
uwwwwuwwww
&\l>-L\l>Â§bl>Lâ€˜vbL*1>l>$~>L\J>l>L\&\&>L*J>J>&\L\L\bJ>L\L-PJ>L\
|â€”'>-\Oonor:on<booon0=:
>-0
oomonon~:\|a\cumuuu-uluwulbL\z>1>wwu:www~M~Nvâ€”-r~>->-r-râ€”-
o-v-r->->-H
|\:c\>~r~::-
:.or\n-
lnlowmw
wwv-Â»
-|>w~r-
vor-I
>-
umÂ»-
u\A>w~>-â€”
umÂ»-
General Operating 1nformation.... ..
Formatting Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
..
Screen Line Length . . . . . . . . o
.,
Monitor Echo........
Line Feed.........
Carriage Return . . . .
....
Backspace and Delete . . . . . . . .
..
Escape Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . T . . . . .
. .
Send Time of Day... . . . .
Clear Transmit Buffer... . . . . . . . . .
..,......
CHAPTER 14 - OPERATING MODES
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
Change Radio Link Data Rate . . â€˜ .
......
Station Identification . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
MYCALL Required at System Start-up...
Substation ldentifiers (SSIDs)......
Automatic Identification . . . . . . .
..
Set Up Loopback Test Circuit.....
'Connect' and 'Disconnect.'.....
LED Status and Mode Indicators...
LEDs at System Start or Reset....
System Loopback Test Connection....
Connect Message..............
Send Packet Character.. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Return to Command Mode . . . . . . . . 4 . . .
.
Return to Converse Mode . . . . .
.....
Terminate the Link - Disconnect..i..
Your First Packet Communication . . . . . o . .
..
System Cable and Switch Check....
Starting the Communication......
What If? . . . . . . .
............
Automatic Operation...,...... . . . . . . . . . . .
H
Beacon Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
Will You Accept Connections?....
Are You Available to Chat? . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Do You Want to Transmit?.. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Digipeater Detai1s.................
Are You a Digipeater?............
Do You Want to be a Digipeater?.,...
Unsuccessful Connections and Retries...
Retries While Connected...........
Monitoring Activity on the Channel..........
Monitoring Other Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Monitoring Digipeaters ~ The WRPT Command
Monitoring Other Stations While Connected.... . . T . . . . .
H
Page
3-11
3-11
3â€”11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-12
A-*l>>b&:{-*1-*1-*1-*1-\-i-\L\-L\J-*1-\1>&~1.~&~L\A-*4-\l>J-*1-\Â£-\#Â£~&~J>&-\&~1>>
IIII |||-- Ill |.|||~|
>-Ir-Iv-v-r-Ir-Ir-I\o\conon\|0\mo~tnu\\.nL*-5-\J>bwwwuummwnmww
uv.n|\>>-v->-O
1-0<;.3 PK88-9

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
J-\&\l-â€˜J-â€˜&â€˜J-â€˜J-*1-*1-\Â§&\Â§J-*1-â€˜Â§J>Â§I-*J~\J-â€˜I-â€˜Â§-lÂ»â€˜l-â€˜A-â€˜bl-\&â€˜l-*4-â€˜J>Â£>J>L\l>8\&\&â€˜J>&â€˜J>Â§Â§J>L\Lâ€˜bL\
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 0 0 w w w 0 w 0
M N M M N M N N N N N N M N N m N ~ M N ~ M N N N H H H H H H H 0 O O O O O O O Q 5 G B Q b F
0 M w w u m u u u m w w b b b > b Â» w N N N m H 0 w e w N H w m w b w N H
CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING MODES (Continued)
Selective Monit0ring.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
The
The
The
The
The
MST
MFROM Command....
MTO Command.....
MCON Command..........
MFILTER Command . . . . .
................
MHEARD Monitor BufÂ£er.................
AMP - The Monitor Time-Stamp C0mmand....
DAYTIME â€” Set the Real-Time Clock.........
Packet Formacting..........................
PACLEN - Long or Short?...
Bac
kspace and Delete.....
Cancel Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.......... . . . . .
..
Redisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
XON/XOFF, START/STOP - Display Flow Control...
The
Mar
PASS Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,.
e Carriage Returns and Line Feeds . . . . . . .
..
Multiple Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........
Default Multiple-Connect Conditions . . . . . .
....
w ~ H
w > w N H
g 0 Q w m w } w N H
The
CHS
The CHCALL Command - Display Multiple-Connect Call Signs.....
The CHDOUBLE Command - Display Doubled Characters . . . . . . . . . .
..
USERS Command - Multiple-Connect Active.....
WITCH Character Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
General Hints on Multi-Connect Operation........
Mailbrop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...... . . . T
....
RAM Space for Message Storage...........
Sys
Cal
Cal
cem Commands . . . . . . . .
...............
Start and Stop Mailbrop Operation....
Local Logon and Verification . . . .
...
Monitor Mailbrop Operation........
Ier Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..........
ler and Sys0p Mailbrop Commands....
B (BYE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
K n (KILL n) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
L (LIST) . . . .
.............. .
R n (READ n) . . . . .
.......................
S callsign (Send callsign) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.H
Sample Session - The Callerâ€˜s Point of View...
Sample Session - The Mai1Dr0p $ys0p's Point of View.... ...
Connect and Logon........ . . . . . .
...........
LIST Messages...........................
READ Messages....
KILL Messages..........
SEND Messages............ . . . . . . . . .
..
Other People's Messages . . . . . . . .
.. .
Multiple Message Commands....
Incorrect Commands.......... .
Sorry, Wrong Number!.........................
Log Off and Disconnect . . . . . .
.................
Page
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-l8
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
TOC-4 PK88-10

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 - COMMAND SUMMARY
Paragraph Page
u\w w m m w uvuuw m w w w m m m w m m
m w 5 b a > u w w w w w M M M P w F H
w N w
N w
M w H w w
w N w
w N H
Introducrion.....
Entering Commands.... .
Command Responses.... .
Messages......
Error
Command List.....
Command Names.
Default Values...........
Parameters, Arguments and Values:... . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. ... -
Parameters....
Boolean Parameters....
Numeric Parameters....
w M w w w w w uvw M w w
I - - . . -
J>-Â§b$-â€˜Viv-IuII\7l\)|â€”*r-'râ€”â€˜
Texc or String Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. -
Using Commands Arguments Without Arguments.... ... -
Controller Messages.........
General.......
C0mmand Mode Error Messages... ... -
Link Status Messages.....
Clear String Commands.......
Commands....
Specific
BBITCONV
ACRDISP.
ACRPACK.
ADDRESSâ€˜
AFILTER.
ALFDISP.
ALFPACK
AWLEN...
AX25L2V2
AXDELAY.
AXHANG..
BBSMSGS.
BEACON..
BKQNDEL.
BTEXT...
CALIBRA.
CANLINE.
CANPAC..
CASEDISP.
CBELL.H
CFROM...
CHCALL. .
CHDOUBLE.
CHECK...
CHSWITCH
CLKADJ..
CMDTIME.
CMSG....
w w w w M w m w
- | v - 1
H P w m w m m M
>-IOO
5-11
. . . . . . . . . .
.. ... 5-12
... 5-12
... 5-13
... 5-13
... 5-lb
... 5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-17
... 5-18
... 5-19
... 5-20
... S-21
... 5-22
... 5-23
... 5-23
... 5-2h
5-25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-26
... 5-27
... 5-28
. ... S-28
... 5-29
S-30
TOC-5 PKBB-11

PK-83 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 - COMMAND SUMMARY (Continued)
Paragraph Page
COMMAND.
CONMODE.
CONNECT.
CONOK...
CONPERM.
CONSTAMP
CONVERSE
CPACTIME
CR......
CSTATUS.
CTEXT...
DAYTIME.
DAYSTAMP
DELETE..
DFROM...
DIGIPEAT
DISCONNE
DISPIAY.
DWAIT...
ECHO....
ESCAPE. .
FLDW....
FRACK...
FULLDUP.
HBAUD...
HEADERLN
HELP....
HID.....
HOST....
HPOLL...
ID4.....
ILFPACK.
I0.....
K.......
KISS....
MAILDROP.
MAXFRAME..
MBELLâ€˜..
MBX.....
MCON....
MDCHECK.
MDIGI...
MDMON...
MDPROMPT
MEMORY..
MFILTER.
MFROM...
MMEARD..
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
.. . ... 5-3b
.. ... 5-35
... 5-35
... 5-36
... 5-37
... S-38
5-39
5-39
5-A0
5-61
5-bl
5-A2
5-43
5-bb
5-A4
5-b5
... 5-46
... 5-46
5-b7
5-47
5-48
5-A8
5-A9
5-A9
5-50
5-50
5-51
... 5-51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-52
5-53
5-50
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-59
S-60
5-60
5-61
5-62
5-63
TOC-6 PKBB-12

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 - COMMAND SUMMARY (Continued)
Paragraph
MONITOR . . . . .
..
MONITOR ON/0FF.... ....
nmzoro . . . . . .
..
MRPT. . . . . . ..
nsrmp . . . . . .
..
mo . . . . . . . . .
..
MYALIAS. ..
MYCALL . . . . . .
..
mzwnomt. . . ..
uonomz. . . .
NUCR. . . ..
uuu. ..
NULLS. . . ..
mcmn. . ..
mznm-:. ..
PARITY. . ..
mss. . . ..
PASSALL. . . ..
PERSIST. . . ..
PPERSIST. . ..
RAWHDLC. ..
REDISPIA. . ..
RELINK4 . ..
RESET. . . ..
RESPTIME. . ..
RESTART. ..
RETRY. . ..
ssunmc. ..
SLOTTIME. . ..
squsuzn. ..
sum. . ..
sror. ..
1-mun. . . ..
TCLEAR. . ..
1-1m:.....
TONE. . . ..
-rmcs. . ..
rams. , ..
'r|u=1.ou. . ..
"muss. , . ..
-rxmzuw. ..
TXFIDW. . ..
uumzo-ro. ..
usmzs. . ..
x1-"1.ou....
XMITOK. . ..
xon-â€˜. . . ..
xou. . ..
Â£282
u-u-uuv-u\u\u\u\u|
.-|- ' .|
\4c~<h0\0\0\c\a~a\
O\aoo\|a\o\u\uvl>
... 5-70
... 5-71
... 5-71
... 5-72
... 5-73
... 5-74
... 5-7A
... 5-75
. . . . â€˜ . . . . . . . .
.. 5-76
. . . . 5 . . . . . . . .
.. 5-77
... 5-78
... 5-78
... 5-79
.., 5-79
... S-80
... 5-80
... 5-80
... 5-81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-82
... 5-82
... 5-83
... 5-B3
... 5-8h
... 5-84
... 5-Sh
... 5-85
... 5-86
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-87
. . . â€˜ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-87
... 5-88
... 5-89
... 5-89
... 5-90
... 5-90
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. 5-91
... 5-92
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. ... 5-92
TOC-7 PK88-13

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TABLE or comzms
Baxaazeah
0\
r-
CHAPTER 6 - TROUBLESHOOTING
. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. .
a\:nc\0~ï¬‚'~o\<7~<7\<7\m0~0\0~a\
bbbkwwwuwmmnwm
umÂ»-1 J>wMa- x>w~Â»--
. General Tests . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
PKBSOM Rev. B 8/BB TOCâ€”8 PK88-lb
Power Supply . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . .
Obvious Problems. . . . . . . . .
Assembly Problems . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
Cabling Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
E&
mmmmmm
- - | 1 II
l\>IQI\}>-lb-â€˜P4
. . 6-2
. SpecificSymptoms...................... . .
Symptom: PK-88 appears dead . . . .

Symptom: Transmitter cannot be keyed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
Symptom: Transmitted signals not copyable by other stations
Symptom: Received signals not copyable. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
...
Terminal Interface Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
Symptom: PK-88 does not communicate with the terminal . . . .
. .
Symptom: PK-88 signs on with mutilated data . . . . . . . .
.. .. .
Symptom: PK-88 does not respond or accept commands . . . . . . .
. .
APPENDICES
PK-88 COMMAND LIST SUPMARY
WARRANTY
TTL HEADER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
SCHEHATIC DIAGRAM & PARTS PICTORIAL
SPECIFIC RADIO CONNECTIONS
PKÂ»88 REVISION SUPPLEMENT 16-MAY-89
COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS
SPECIAL NOTES TO AEA SOFTWARE USERS
NET/ROM MODI FICATION
LITHIUM BATTERY
mmmmmm
'-|-
o~o\u\ulu\L~z-
mm

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION
l.l
1.l.l
l.l.2
1.1.3
CHAPTER l
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
The PK~88 Operating Manual describes the general characteristics and
operation of your PK-88 Packet Controller. This Operating Manual will
help you to install, adjust and operate your system.
Scope
The Operating Manual provides detailed information on installation and
operation of the PK-88. The manual describes the PK-88's features,
system components and basic operation on Packet Radio. Information
on theory of operation, hardware and software descriptions, protocols
and troubleshooting instructions is also available.
General
The PK-88 can be used with any standard communications terminal or
computer equipped with an RS-232C ASCII serial data port and an appro-
priate communications program or terminal emulator. For information
on operation with nonstandard interfaces or terminals. please contact
the manufacturer.
Application
The PK-B8 Packet Controller is a digital link between your radio and
your computer or terminal. The PK-88 provides all decoding, encoding
and transmitter control routines needed to send and receive packet
radio. You can use your computer or any ASCII data terminal with the
same communications program or terminal emulator that you use with a
telephone line modem.
1.1 PKBB-15

PK-83 OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION
1.2
1.2
1.2.2
1.2.3
Specifications
As part of its program of product improvement, the manufacturer re-
serves the right to change this product's specifications. Changes
will be made to the information in this document and incorporated in
revisions to this manual. Specifications are subject to change with-
out notice.
Description
The Model PK-88 is an asynchronous PAD (Packet Assembler/Disassembler)
or data controller that includes a bui1tÂ»in modem for packet radio
operation. The PK-88 hardware HDLC system converts serial, asynchro-
nous, ASCII data to the internationally accepted AX.25 packet radio
protocol via an EIA standard RS-232 serial port. In addition, a Host
mode. raw HDLC and KISS (â€˜Keep It Simple, Stupidâ€˜) TNC protocols are
available for applications other than AX-25 protocols.
Operating Modes:
Packet Radio per AX.25, half- or full-duplex.
Mailbrop - personal mailbox system
Host Mode with Raw HDLC and KISS TNC protocol for
service with TCP/IP and specialized applications.
Modem Characteristics
Modulator/Demodulatorz
Data format:
Modem Tones:
Transmitter:
Modulation method:
Frequency accuracy:
Harmonics:
Receiver:
Demodulation method:
Output Level:
Processor System
Protocol conversion:
RAM:
ROM:
Hardware HDLC:
AMD 7910 â€˜World Chipâ€˜ modem.
Serial, asynchronous
Bell I03 and Bell 202
Binary, phase-coherent NRZ1 FSK
Bell 202 (mark) +/- [Hz
All others (mark) +/Â» 0,4 Hz
05 dB below fundamental, single tone
Differential FM detection
5 to 100 millivolts RMS, adjustable by
internal control
Zilog Z-80 microprocessor
32 kilobytes
Up to 48 kilobytes of ROM may be used
Zilog 8530 SCC
2 PK88â€”16

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
lnput/Output Connections
Radio Interface:
Input/Output Lines
External Modem Interface:
TTL Input/Output Lines
Terminal Interface:
Input/Output Lines
Terminal Data Rates
Controls and Indicators
Front Panel Controls:
Status and Mode Indicators:
General
Power Requirements:
Mechanical:
Environmental:
Ambient Temperature:
INTRODUCTION
Eight-pin microphone connector
Receive audio
Transmit audio
Pushâ€”T0-Talk (PTT)
External squelch input
Ground
Pins 13 through 17 of Connector J1
Receive data (RXD)
Transmit data (TXD)
Transmit Clock (TXC)
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
Ground
Standard RS-232C 25-pin DB25 connector
RS-232C (CCITT V.2h/V.28) with full
handshake (hardware and software)
Auto-baud selection of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, and 9600 nrs. nmun adds 1.5, 50,
57, 75, 100, 110, 150, 200, 600 and
19,200 BPS terminal rates.
Power Switch
CONV, TRANS, CMD, SEND, DOD, STA, CON,
MULT, PWR
+13 VDC (12 to 16 VDC) at 500 mA.
Internally fused, with reverse-polarity
protection.
7.5 inches by 6.05 inches by 1.5 inches
(19.05 mm by 15.4 mm by 3.8 mm)
Height 2 pounds 5 ounces (1.05 kg)
Operating: O C to +55 C
Storage: -A0 C to +60 C
l-3 PK88-17

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION
System Components
The PK-88 Packet Controller package contains the following items:
One PK-88 Packet Controller
Power cable with single 3.5-mm coaxial connector
Operating Manual
Two DIP Bypass Headers for TTL Serial Interface Compatibility
OOOO
Input/Output Devices
The PK-88 can be used with any standard ASCII data terminal or com-
puter equipped with an RS-2326 serial data port and a communications
program or terminal emulator. Data and control signals are exchanged
between the PK-88 and the computer or terminal at standard RS-232C
(CCITT V.2b/V.28) levels.
Your computer and terminal program and their associated tape, disk and
printer I/O devices provide the means to store messages received and
retrieve messages for transmission. Although highly desirable, these
peripheral or I/0 devices are not needed for PK-88 operation.
Note In this Operating Manual, 'computerâ€˜ and â€˜terminalâ€™ mean the
same thing - the keyboard and monitor or printer with which
you communicate with the PK-88.
System Transmitter/Receiver Performance Requirements
Most modern radio transceivers are capable of excellent packet radio
performance. Radio switching and other delays can be compensated by
parameter value adjustments to the PK-88.
The PK-88 provides softwareÂ»controlled timing variations that permit
operation with almost all HF and VHF/UHF radios in general use today.
lâ€”A PK88-18

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
Preliminary Information
This section contains instructions for a 'generic' installation and
system checkout to install and verify the PK-88's operation with both
VHF-FM and HF SS5 radios.
Equipment Required
A complete PK-88 Packet Controller system consists of the PK-88 and a
12 to 16-volt DC power supply, a computer, a terminal emulator or com-
munication program for the computer, a radio transceiver or receiver-
transmitter combination and its power supply.
Your PK-88 Packet Controller is furnished with the cables required for
connection to your radio and to an external power supply. You must
add the microphone connector required by your radio, the power supply
and the RS-232 cable that connects the PK-88 to your computer.
RAM battery backup is provided by two internal AA batteries.
(user supplied and installed)
Precautions
We strongly recommend that all RS-232 cables and connectors be made
with the best commercial quality shielded materials, and that careful
and correct grounding and bonding procedures be observed in the in-
stallation of the radio equipment being used with the PK-88.
Installation
The following sections describe the connectors and their connections
to your computer and your radio.
Power Connections
Power is connected to the PK-88's rear-panel coaxial power receptacle
from any well regulated 12-volt DC power supply (12 to 16 VDC) capable
of supplying at least 600 milliamperes. An optional wall adapter
power supply can be used.
o Be sure your power supply can furnish the required current with
a ripple voltage of less than one volt peak to peak.
o Be sure you connect the positive voltage to the center pin of the
coaxial power plug.
o Check the supplied cord to determine which lead is positive.
If you accidentally invert the power power cable, an internal fuse
will open to protect the PK-88 from reverse-voltage damage. Note that
the 0.1 mid bypass capacitor C1 may be damaged. If polarity reversal
does occur, open the PK-88, replace the internal fuse and capacitor Cl
with identical components.
2-l PK88-19

PK-86 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.2.
Radio Input and Output Connections (See Table 2-l)
We supply a shielded cable with your PK-88. You must supply and con-
nect the plugs for the cable ends. This cable connects your PK-88 to
your radio's microphone receptacle or PTT and phone patch/tone inputs.
NOTE: Hire only the PK-88 cable end at this time. Leave the â€œradioâ€�
end unwired. You will use the radio cable in a test configuration
during your first '1oopbaclc' experiments with packet operation.
Four signals and ground pass between your PK-B8 and your radio via
eight-pin receptacle J2. The pin wiring is shown in Table 2-1.
Pin
Signal Name Cglor Description
\:oomwr-'
Audio and PTT common return
PK-88 keys transmitter
AFSK from PK-88 Q transmitter
Al-â€˜SK from receiver to PK~B8
Allows PK-88 to detect activity on
a shared-mode channel (optional)
Ground G(.L'*-I hula
Push-To-Talk llugjqÂ» -I01â€™
Microphone audio {Z59 Uhioe
Receive audio 3446 in
Squelch input (Optional) Black
NOTE: The remaining pins are not connected.
2.2.3
NOT E
NQTE:
Table 2-1 J2 Radio Port Connector
Computer Connections (See Table 2-2)
The serial interface in the PK-88 comes from the factory configured
for RS-232C voltage levels. Please see Appendix B for the TTL header
installation instructions if your computer does not support RS-232C.
The PK-88's rear-panel serial port connector carries data and control
signals between your computer and the PK-88. The PK-88 is connected
to a computer just like you connect a RS-232C modem. If you now use
your computer with a modem, connect the PK-88 the same way. Use any
terminal program you now use with your modem. The minimum number of
pins that must be connected is shown in Table 2-2.
The following are the least number of wires you can use to connect the
PK-88 with a computer or terminal. This three-wire connection does
g permit hardware flow control. In this case, software flow control
(XON-XOFF) must be provided by the terminal program.
1 Â§ignal ï¬‚ame Description
Z Transmit Data Serial data from computer Q PK-88
3 Receive Data Serial data from PK-88 t_o computer
7 Signal Ground Conuuon ground for both data lines
Table 2-2 Minimum Serial Port Connections Required by PK-88
Z-2 PK88-20

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
Controls and Indicators
The PK-88 has a single rear-panel control:
0 POWER ON/OFF push switch - disconnects power from external supply
Status l.EDs
The PK-88's front panel has the following LED (Light Emitting Diode)
indicators:
CONV System is in Converse Mode
TRANS System is in Transparent Mode
CMD System is in Command Mode
SEND Transmitter Push-to-Talk line is enabled
DCD Data Carrier Detect
STA Packet Erame(s) unacknowledged
CON Packet link is in connected state
MULT Multiple Connection in progress
PWR Power On Indicator
Serial Port Configuration
Verify that the PK~88's serial port and data words are set up properly
for your computer. Should your monitor display garbled or incorrect
characters or 'funny' graphic symbols, you can change the PK-88's ser<
ial port parity and word length. The common parity and word length
combination is seven data bits, even parity, one stop bit.
Your computer will probably accept the PK-88's default setting, even
if it actually uses a different setting. If your computer requires
eight data bits, you may have to set parity to 'noneâ€˜; otherwise text
may be interpreted as graphics or other special characters.
To set eight bits, no parity, type:
AWLEN 8 (eight-bit words) PARITY 0 (no parity bit)
To return to seven bits, even parity, type:
AWLEN 7 (seven-bit words) PARITY 3 (even parity)
You must type the command "RESTART" for the settings to take effect.
One of these combinations will satisfy most computers. You are more
likely to require a different setting if you have a â€˜dumbâ€™ terminal
rather than a computer, or if you have configured your computer's
serial port for some special application. If your computer needs odd
parity, set PARITY to l.
If you see framing errors, try this for shorter characters:
AWLEN 7 (sevenÂ»bit words) PARITY 0 (no parity bit)
2-3 PK88-21

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
Screen Displays
Some computers and terminal programs are configured to certain default
characteristics that may at first seem incompatible with the PK-88.
Follow these hints as you begin to 'dialogue' with your new TNC.
Echoes
If you see two characters on your screen for each character you type,
then your computer and the PK-88 are echoing your typed characters.
tmd:RREESSEETT
o Type: ECHO OFF to stop the PK-58's echoes.
If you use the PK-88 later with a different terminal program, you may
see nothing displayed when you type. In that case, set ECHO ON.
Line Feeds and Carriage Returns
If lines displayed appear to be double spaced, your computer is adding
an extra line feed <LF> when it displays a carriage return <CR>.
0 Set ALFDISP OFF to stop the PK-88 from adding an <LF>.
If you change terminal equipment you may have to set ALFDISP ON to
restore the PK-88's automatic line feeds.
Screen Width
If ALFDISP is ON, the PK-88 sends an extra <CR>, or <CR><LF> to your
terminal when 80 characters have been displayed on a line. The screen
width default value is B0, the width of most CRT displays.
If your computer does ggt automatically break long lines:
o Set ACRDISP (the screen width) to the width of your display.
o For a computer using a TV set for a display, set ACRDISP to 40.
If your computer does automatically break long lines:
o Set ACRDISP to O to disable this feature. Otherwise, you will
get two <CR>s when the line wraps around.
Display Speeds
A few computers or terminal programs may lose the first characters of
a line when several lines are displayed in rapid succession.
o Set NUCR ON (delay after <CR>), or NULF ON (delay after <LF>) to
give the computer more time between lines.
The delay is adjusted by NULLS, which sets the number of character
times for the delay.
2-A PK88-22

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.7 System Setup and Verification
DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE MAKING ANY OTHER CONNECTIONS!
Do these steps before connecting any cables between the PK-88 and your
radio.
m w 0 w b u Mid
. Open the PK-B8 and install 2 AA batteries in the Battery Holder.
. Connect the PK-88 to your computer via the RS-232 cable.
. Turn ON your computer. Load and run your communications program.
Connect the wired end of the shielded cable to J2 on your PK-88.
. Connect the wires from the PK-88's J2 pins 2 and 8 to each other.
. Connect the PK-88 to a regulated l2-volt DC power supply.
. Press the PK-88's power switch to the ON position.
. Set your computer's data rate to 1200 bauds, 7 bits, even parity
if possible. If your serial port is operating at 1200 bauds, you
will see the following message right away:
Please type a star ( * ) for autobaud routine.
If this message appears, go to Step 10 now.
9. If you are using your computer or terminal at a different data
rate, word length or parity, your screen may show meaningless
â€˜garbageâ€™ or mutilated characters, or nothing at all. If true,
go to Step 10 now.
(Don't worry! - the PK-B8 is doing its â€˜auto-baudâ€˜ routine. It
measures your computer's data rate, digital word length, parity,
and then sets itself accordingly. The PK-88 automatically scans
baud rates of 300, 1200, 2h00, 4800 and 9600 bauds.)
10. Type several asterisks (*) at intervals of one second.
If the cable and connections between the PK-B8 and your computer
are correct, the MULT LED will be extinguished and other LEDs
will be lit as the PK-88 does its â€˜auto-baudâ€˜ routine. As soon
as the PK~88 has recognized your data rate and set itself to your
data rate, the CMD LED is lit and your screen displays the sign-
on message ending with the â€œcmd:" command prompt:
PK-88 is using default values.
AEA PKâ€”88 Packet Controller
AX.2S Level 2 Version 2.0
Copyright (C) 1986, 1987, 1988 by
Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.
Release xx.xxx.xx +
Checksum $xx
cmdt
NOTE: The Release date and checksum shown above will change as the
PK-88's firmware is revised or updated. Please note this
Date and Checksum on the inside front cover of this manual.
2-5 PK88-23

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALIATION
Do not turn on your radio yet!
Type â€˜MY AAAâ€˜ followed by a RETURN (or ENTER key). Your monitor
should display:
cmdimy aaa
MYCALL was PK88
HYCALL now AM
Type 'C AAAâ€™ followed by a RETURN. After a few moments, your
monitor should display:
cmd:c aaa
*** CONNECTED to AAA
Type a few characters, any characters, followed by a RETURN.
After a few moments, your monitor should echo the same characters
that you have just typed.
Type '(CONTROLâ€”C)' (type 'C' while pressing the CONTROL key down)
Your monitor should respond with:
cmd:
Type â€˜HE 300' followed by a RETURN. Your monitor should respond
wltht
HBAUD was 1200
HBAUD now 300
Type â€˜Kâ€™ followed by a RETURN. Your monitor should echo the
characters you've just typed.
Type â€˜(CONTROL-C).' Your monitor should respond with:
cmd:
Type 'D' followed by a RETURN. Your monitor should respond with:
c|nd:d
*** DISCONNECTED: AAA
If you have done all these steps successfully, you have completed
the system installation and you are ready to begin operating.
If you have problems with the steps shown above, return to Step l
AFTER checking all cables and connectors. Read each step again
carefully. If you still have problems, shut down the PK-88 and
contact our Customer Service Department as suggested in the front
of this manual.
If all the front~panel LEDs remain lit at system start. verify
that your power supply can provide at least 600 ma. at 12 VDC.
2-6 PK88-21Â¢

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTAllATION
Radio Connections and Setup
DISCONNECT All POWER BEFORE MAKING ANY OTHER CONNECTIONS!
Use this simple stepâ€”by-step routine to verify that all cables and
connectors are properly installed, and that the PK-88 Packet Control-
ler is operating correctly. The procedure will also help you become
familiar with the software commands and responses.
If you cannot solve a problem after carefully reading this manual and
checking all cables and connectors, please refer to the instructions
for calling the manufacturer in the beginning of the manual.
During these initial checkout procedures, Q9 not connect the PK-88's
PTT and AFSK lines to your radio until instructed to do so. Make all
the other connections as described below.
After all the cables between the PK-88, your radio and your computer
have been installed, apply power to your equipment in this order:
radio, computer, PK-88.
The installation procedure uses the simplest method of connecting the
PKâ€”88 to your radio, via the radio's microphone jack. However, unless
you have an auxiliary speaker-mike jack, you may not be able to moniÂ»
tor the channel or conveniently use the radio on voice.
This type of connection may also be susceptible to RFI from nearby
transmitters. After your first trials with the installation routines
in an initial test phase, you can consider alternate methods shown
later in this Operating Manual for permanent station installation.
Use only shielded wire for microphone audio circuits. If you notice
significant hlï¬‚ in the monitored audio during modulation adjustments,
verify ground and shield connections in the cable between the radio
and the PK-88. The cable supplied with the PK~8B is shielded for
these applications.
This method requires a second receiver at the same site so that you
can listen to your own signal. Read the remainder of this chapter
carefully before connecting the PK~B8 to your radio.
In this method, the PK-88 is connected directly to the radio; initial
tests are performed without making any adjustments in the radio or
adding any signalâ€”level balancing devices in the cables.
Z-7 PK58-25

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.8.1
2.8
This procedure is is divided into separate sections for FM and SSB
radios. Follow these steps exactly in order to:
o Verify that your radio and PK~88 are connected as shown in Table
2-1 earlier in this manual, and Figure 2-1 below.
o Connect the PK-88's AFSK audio output to your radio's microphone
receptacle or auxiliary input jack.
o Adjust the PK-88's internal output-level control (VRl) to obtain
proper modulation.
o Take the receiver's audio output from an earphone plug or speaker
jack and feed the audio directly to the PK-88.
Insert the eight-pin connector into J2 on the PK-88's rear panel and
connect the microphone plug to your radio's microphone jack.
PTT (Push-to-Talk) Configuration
The PK-88 is configured at the factory for positive PTT. This seems
to work with most modern radios. However, you can change the polarity
of the PTT configuration as needed. Follow these steps:
o Remove four screws from the sides of the PK-88 and lift off the
cover.
o Viewed from the front, jumper post JP5 is located at the rear
left-hand side of the board in front of J4. JP5 is a Chtee~pin
jumper post on which you install a slip-on jumper to connect the
center pin to one of the outside pins.
o To change to negative PTT polarity, move the jumper block to the
opposite center-end pair of pins.
o Reinstall the cover and replace the four side screws.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD Pin 8) Jumper JP3
Certain applications may require that the connected state raises the
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal on Pin 8 of the RSÂ»232 interface at
rear-panel connector J1. Jumper post JP3, located in front of Jl,
between integrated circuits U4 and U5, is factory set so that DCD Pin
8 is permanently pulled high.
If DCD is required active in the connected state only, move the JP3
jumper plug to the opposite position.
The NA7MBL packet BBS programs require that JP3 provide DCD high only
in the connected state.
See the PK-88 schematic diagram in the Appendices section for further
details on JP3.
2Â»8 PK88-26

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL 1NsTALLAT10N
2.8.3 FM Installation and Adjustment
Disconnect power before making any other connections.
1. Remove four screws from the sides of the PK-88 and lift off
the cover.
2. Connect the PK~88 and FM radio as shown below in Figure 2-l.
I nu me wï¬‚lllnoa, mu ï¬�r:
(On 1-" mm-1
m. we-m; nun in . (|uI\I|r~
u~<|-in dluzuon m. mu ah!
â€™ am vuv at a m m toisilrml.
V sown rm mm n Mala)

%lâ€�////
numm mma mm
. mu nu nu urn
1Â» =
. Mmunm
// . n- Â¢.-mu-..
l.hhmnUm
7. GHIDIAL Sdlllï¬‚l
1..! .....||, .....<...,
w mm ._ -3 n. mum mm: (no)
Figure 2-1 Radio-to-PK-88 Connections
3. Apply power to your computer and PK-88 and start your terminal
program.
4. Connect the radio to a dummy load; be prepared to monitor your
transmissions with another nearby radio.
5. Enter the Calibrate mode by typing â€˜CAL <RETURN>â€˜.
Ignore the â€˜zerosâ€™ scrolling down the left side of your screen.
The self-contained 7910 modem chip does not require calibration
or tone adjustments. The 'zeros' appear only to show that the
PK-88 is in the â€˜Calibrateâ€™ mode for the purpose of keying the
transmitter and applying steady-state tone modulation for trans>
mitter adjustment.
NOTE: In the Calibrate mode only, the â€˜K' key toggles the
transmitter PTT line on and off. The â€˜SPACE BARâ€˜ tog-
gles the PK-88's AFSK tone generator from â€˜Markâ€™ (Stop
Polarity, the lower-pitched tone) to 'Space' (Start
Polarity, the higher-pitched tone). The PK>68's trans-
mit watchdog timer circuit unkeys your transmitter
automatically after sixty (60) seconds. As you perform
the following adjustments, unkey periodically, then
rekey the transmitter by typing â€˜Kâ€™.
6. Press the â€˜Kâ€™ key on the keyboard to key the transmitter. You
should hear a continuous tone in the monitor receiver.
7. Tap the space bar several times until you hear the higher-pitched
of the two tones ('Spaceâ€˜ or Start Polarity).
2-9 PK88-27

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
With the PK-88 keying the transmitter, adjust the transmit audio
level as follows:
o Listen to the monitor receiver; turn the PK-88's internal
AFSK Output Level adjustment screw clockwise (CW) until you
hear QQ increase in output level in the monitoring receiver,
0 Rotate the AFSK Output Level adjustment screw counterclock-
wise until the audio signal on the monitoring receiver is
noticeably reduced below the maximum level
Type 'K' again to return to the receive mode.
Type 'Qâ€˜ to â€˜Quitâ€™ (exit) the calibration routine.
You have set your FM transmitter's deviation to the apggoximgte
level which will be adequate for initial operation. However, an
accurate setting will require a standard FM deviation meter.
For best results with VHF/UHF transceivers at 1200 BPS, set the
transmitter deviation so that deviation on the higher tone does
not exceed b.O KHz peak. With standard pre-emphasis, most trans-
mitters will produce approximately 2.5 KHz deviation on the lower
(Mark/Stop) tone. Excessive deviation is likely to cause
decoding errors at the receiving station.
If your transmitter has an easily accessible microphone gain con-
trol, increase the setting of the "deviation control" and reduce
the gain of the transmitter microphone circuit. This usually
prevents excessive deviation limiting and bad mark-to-space tone
amplitude ratios.
with your radio in the receive mode, open the squelch control so
that a steady hiss or noise is heard on a speaker.
Set the receiver's volume control so the DCD LED on the PK-88
just lights with the receiver unsquelched.
This is the approximate proper audio level for best receive per-
formance from the PK-88's modem.
Reset your receiver's squelch control for normal operation.
Reinstall the cover and replace the four side screws.
2-10 PK88-28

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.8.4
SSB Installation and Adjustment
Installation and adjustment of the PK-88 with SSB radios is usually
simpler and more direct than with FM equipment. You will use the same
kind of cables and connectors that you use with your FM gear.
Digital modes with an SSE radio require some different settings of the
radio's operating controls for proper packet operation. Be sure to
observe the following precautions:
OOOO
Set vox to E.
Set speech compression to QEE.
Set AGC to Â§AÂ§I (if available).
Disconnect the ALC cables between your SSH radio and any external
RF amplifier you wish to use in packet radio service.
NOTE: Make all connections with power off.
If your radio has a phone patch input and external PTT connections,
the PK-88 AFSK output can be connected to those input jacks. leaving
the microphone jack for normal service. However, some microphones are
connected at all times (regardless of the PTT line's state. In this
case, disconnect the microphone to prevent inadvertent loading of the
audio input circuit. If the phone patch jack has a series isolating
resistor, your microphone can remain connected.
l. Connect the PK-88 and SSB radio as shown in Figure 2-l
2. Apply power to the PK-88 and your computer and start the terminal
program.
3. Connect your SSB radio to a dummy load.
4. If your SSB radio has a â€˜monitorâ€™ facility, i.e., an audio output
that lets you listen to the audio signals entering the microphone
or phone patch jacks, turn that monitor circuit on.
5. Set the radio MODE selector to either USB (upper sideband) or LS5
(lower sideband). Because packet radio uses NRZI data on the
radio link, the sideband used does ggg affect the data sense or
polarity. However, the radio's tuning calibration or frequency
display will vary depending on which sideband is selected.
6. Set the radio's meter switch to the 'ALC' position. If the radio
doesn't have an 'ALC' indication, set the meter switch to 'IPâ€˜ to
read output device or plate current. If an output device or
plate current reading isn't available, set the meter to indicate
power output.
7. Set the PK-88's TONE value to either TONE 0 for the low tone pair
or TONE l for the high tone pair.
2-ll PK88-29

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
8. Set HBAUD to 300.
9. Enter the Calibrate mode by typing â€˜CAL <RETURN>'.
Ignore the â€˜zerosâ€™ scrolling down the left side of your screen.
The self-contained 7910 modem chip does not require calibration
or tone adjustments. The â€˜zerosâ€™ appear only to show that the
PK-88 is in the 'Calibrate' mode for the purpose of keying the
transmitter and applying steady-state tone modulation for trans-
mitter adjustment.
NOTE: In the Calibrate mode only. the â€˜K' key toggles the
transmitter PTT line on and off. The â€˜SPACE BARâ€™ tog-
gles the PK-88's AFSK tone generator from 'Mark' (Stop
Polarity, the lower-pitched tone) to 'Space' (Start
Polarity, the higher-pitched tone). The PK-88's trans-
mit watchdog timer circuit unkeys your transmitter
automatically after sixty (60) seconds. As you perform
the following adjustments, unkey periodically, then
rekey the transmitter by typing 'K'.
10. Press the 'K' key on the keyboard to key the transmitter. You
should hear a continuous tone in the monitor output.
ll. Tap the space bar several times until you hear the higher-pitched
of the two tones (â€˜Spaceâ€™).
12. with the PK-B8 keying the transmitter, adjust the transmit audio
level as follows:
o Rotate the microphone gain control clockwise to about one-
quarter open.
0 Turn the PK-88's internal AFSK Output Level adjustment
screw (VRl) clockwise (CW) until until the ALC meter shows
only a very small deflection from the unmodulated reading.
Check the radio's output current or output power indicators.
NOTE: Verify the radio manufacturer's output device current
specifications.
o Adjust the AFSK Output Level control until the radio's indi-
cators show approximately fifty percent (50%) of the manu-
facturer's rated full-power reading.
EXAMPLE: If the radio's output device current specification for
CW operation is 200 mA, set the AFSK Output Level con-
trol and your microphone gain control so that the out-
put device current indicates approximately 100 mA.
l3. Type 'Q' to QUIT the calibrate mode.
2-12 PK88-30

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
You have now set the PK-88's transmit audio output level and the
SSB radio's microphone gain control to an approximately correct
level for packet radio operation.
1k. With your radio in receive mode, tune the receiver to a clear,
unoccupied frequency.
15. Set the receiver's audio volume control (AF Gain) to the position
you would normally use for CW reception, or to a position such
that the DCD LED on the PK-88 is just lit by the output noise
signals from your receiver.
This is the approximate receiver audio output level for best re-
ceive performance from the PK~88's modem.
2-13 PK88-31

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.9
Command List Displays
Type the command word â€˜display.â€™ Your screen will show:
2.9.1
cmdzdisplay
DISPLAY A,C,I,L,M,T,Z
Display Complete Command List
At the 'cmd:' prompt, type the command word â€˜DISPLAY Z.â€™ The PK-88
displays the entire list as shown in APPENDIX A.
The â€˜DISPLAY Zâ€˜ command shows the complete command list. The defaults
shown below are in effect when the PK-88 is turned on for the first
time, and each time that you type the â€˜RESETâ€™ command.
2.9.2
Display Partial Command Lists
The command list can be displayed in sections according to the class
of parameter or function you wish to see. The DISPLAY function is
divided into the following seven classes:
Nv-l.'Z{">-40>
Asynchronous port parameters
Special characters
Identification parameters
Link parameters
Monitor parameters
Timing parameters
All parameters displayed
2.9.3 Display Asynchronous Port Parameters
cmd:disp
SBITCONV
ACRDISP
AFILTER
ALFDISP
AHLEN
BBSMSGS
CASEDISP
ECHO
ESCAPE
FLOW
ILFPACK
NUCR
NULF
NULLS
PARITY
TBAUD
TRFLOW
TXFLOW
XFLON
a
OFF
80
OFF
ON
8
OFF
0 (as is)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
O
O (none)
1200
OFF
OFF
ON
Strip bit 7 in CONVERSE
Screen width
Never send MFILTER characters to radio.
Send <LF> after <CR> to terminal
Data bits per word, to terminal (autobaud)
Never show "was"; use older header format
Select character case to terminal
Echo typed keyboard characters
Send ESC character $18 as $2h
Stop echo to screen while typing
Ignore all <LFs> from terminal
Nulls to terminal after <CR>
Nulls to terminal after <LF>
Number of nulls for NUCR & NULF
Terminal program parity (0~3, aunobaud)
Terminal baud raLe (autobaud)
Terminal flow control in Transparent mode
PK~B8 flow control in Transparent mode
Software flow control
2-lb PKB8-32

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.9.0 Display Special Characters
cmd:disp c
BKONDEL
CANLINE
CANPAC
CHCALL
CHDOUBLE
CHSWITCH
COMAND
DELETE
PASS
REDISPLA
SENDPAC
START
STOP
TIME
XOFF
XON
ON
$18
$19
OFF
OFF
$00
$03
OFF
$16
$l2
$0D
$11
$13
Slh
$13
$11
(CTRL-X)
(CTRL-Y)
(CTRLâ€”C)
(CTRL-V)
(CTRL~R)
(CTRLâ€”M)
(CTRL-Q)
(CTRL-S)
(CTRL-T)
(CTRL-S)
(CTRL-Q)
Send <BS> <SP> <BS> for DELETE char.
LINE DELETE character
PACKET DELETE character
Show call sign after channel ID
Show CHSWITCH character twice
Channel-select (Link) character
Character escape to COMMAND Mode
Use <BS> ($08), not <DEL> ($7F)
Pass input editing character
Reâ€”disp1ay current input buffer
Character that 'sends' a packet
Resume sending data to terminal
Stop sending data to terminal
Insert â€˜send timeâ€™ in text
Stop sending data to terminal
Resume sending data to terminal
2.9.5 Display Identification Parameters
cmdzdisp i
UNPROTO CQ
BEACON EVERY 0
BTEXT (emp
CBELL OFF
CMSG OFF
crexr AEA PK-88 (etc)
HID OFF
MAILDROP OFF
HDPROMPT Enter message (etc)
MYALIAS none
MYCALL PK88
FY)
Path/address to send UI frames
Set beacon timing (X10 seconds)
120 byte (maximum) BEACON text
Beep on connect and disconnect
Send CTEXT message to caller
120 byte (maximum) CONNECT text
Send ID UI packet every 9.5 mins
Personal Mailbrop system
Prompt sent to Maildrop caller
Alternate MYGALL
Your call sign for packet address
2-15 PK88-33

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
2.9.6 Display Link Parameters
cmdzdisp l
INSTALLATION
CONNECT Link state is: DISCONNECTED
ACRPACK on
ALFPACK on
AX25L2V2 on
cmon all
CONMODE CONVERSE
conmzn on-"
nnzon all
FULLDUP on
HBAUD 1200
uammmz 4
uswnomz on
uonomz ow
mcuzu 122
PASSALL OFF
1zz1.1m< on
army 1o
SQUELCH OFF
TONE 3 (1200/2200 E
TRIES 0
usras 1
mrrox on
2.9.7 Display Monitor Parameters
cmd:disp m
CONSTAMP OFF
DAYSTAMP OFF
HEADERLN ON
MBELL OFF
MBX none
MCON 0 (none)
MDIGI OFF
MDMON ON
MFILTER $80
MFROM all
MONITOR A (UA DM C D I
MPROTO ON
MRPT ON
MSTAMP OFF
MTO none
TRACE OFF
Add <CR> to packet
Send <LF> after <CR>, packet
Operate as AX.25 Version 2.0
Connect requests from list of calls
Mode to enter when link starts
Never disconnect this link
Digipeat these call signs only
Full-Duplex terminal operation
Packet link (radio) baud rate
Maximum un-ACKâ€˜d frames allowed
Return to Command Mode at DISC
Never switch modes without command
Maximum information bytes in packet
Ignore CRC in HDLC (â€˜Junk Modeâ€˜)
Reconnect after retrying out
Maximum number of frame repeats
Select receiver squelch polarity
Bell 202 modem tones, equalizer ON
Show or force retry count
Maximum multiple connections
PTT line can be keyed
Mark connections with time/date
Include DATE in time>stamp
Insert <CR> after headers
Beep if selected station is heard
Monitor channel without headers
Monitor while connected (0-6)
Monitor digipeated frames
Monitor remote caller's activity
Filter all received control
characters except CTRL~M (C/R),
CTRL-J (L/F) and TAB (CTRL-I)
Monitor source
Monitor mode level select (O-6)
Monitor I-frames with PID SFO
Show digipeaters in headers
Time-stamp monitored frames
Monitor destination
Hex dump of packet frame
2-16 PKB8-3b

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION
2.9.8 Display Timing Parameters
cmdzdisp t
AXDELAY 0 (O0 msec.)
AXHANG 0 (000 msec.)
CHECK 30 (300 msec.)
CLKADJ 0
CMDTIME 10 (1000 msec.)
CPACTIME OFF
DWAIT 16 (160 msec.)
FRACK 3 (3 sec.)
PACTIME AFTER l0 (1000 msec)
PERSIST 63
PPERSIST ON
RESPTIME 5 (500 msec.)
SLOTTIME 10 (100 msec.)
TXDEIAY 30 (300 msec.)
2.10 Immediate Commands
Repeater key-up delay (X10 ms.)
Repeater hang time (X10 ms.)
Idle link timeout (X10 seconds)
Correction for real-time clock
Transparent Mode escape timer
Use packet timeout in Converse
Delay for digi repeat (X10 ms.)
Time (X1 seconds.) to wait for ACK
Packet transmit timer (X100 ms.)
P-persistent CSMA threshold
P-persistent CSMA instead of DNAIT
Minimum delay before sending ACK
P~persistent slot time (X10 ms.)
PTT key-to-data delay (X10 ms.)
The 'immediate' commands do not have default values. These commands
take effect as soon as you type them (and a <RETURN>), to start, stop
or activate a specific PK-88 function.
Like all other PK-88 commands, the immediate commands can be typed
with a short mnemonic or abbreviated form. See the command descrip-
tions in Chapter 7, â€˜Command Summaryâ€˜.
CALIBRAT
CONNECT
CONVERSE
CSTATUS
DAYTIME
DISCONNE
DISPLAY
HELP
ID
K
MDCHECK
MHEARD
RESET
RESTART
TCLEAR
TRANS
2.10.1 Unlisted Commands
Start calibration routine
Send connect request to <Cal1>
Start Converse Mode from Command
Show status of channels (links)
Show or enter time of day
Send DISC to distant station
Show PK~88 parameters/classes
Show a brief list of commands
Force ID packet via Unproto path
Same as CONVERSE
Activate MailDrop from terminal side (Sys0p)
Display call signs heard
RESET bbRAM to factory defaults
Same as power-on/off reset
Clear the Transmit Buffer
Start Transparent Data Mode
The following commands Q9 not appear in the displayed command list
ADDRESS CALIBRAT CONOK CR HELP HOST HPOLL I0 KISS MDCHECK
MEMORY RANHDLC
These commands are explained in the Command Summary in Chapter 7.
2-17 PK88-35

PKâ€”83 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.ll
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
Detailed Connections for Specific Computers
Many computers require a serial port adapter card that incorporates
the necessary interface circuitry. Some popular computers in this
category are the Apple II series, the IBM PC (and many compatibles),
the Tandy 1000, 1200 and 3000-series computers and the Sanyo MBC-55X
series. If you are using one of these computers refer to the section,
â€˜Other Computers with Nonstandard Serial Ports.â€˜
Computers that do not have a serial port and do not permit use of a
suitable adapter or level converter cannot be used with the PK-88.
Computers with Specific Serial Interfaces
Apple Macintosh
The Macintosh serial port is compatible with the RS-A22 standard, but
can be used with the RS-232C port on the PK-88.
Wire a cable as shown below:
MACINTOSH (DB9?) PK-88 (DB25P)
:r-4o=~ov||-
re wormÂ»-4
O
on
Note that pin l is not connected inside the Macintosh. Use a shielded
serial cable and connect both pins numbered 'l' to the shield. Con-
nect pin l at the Macintosh end to the main ground on the computer.
Commodore 6b, GQC, 128, VIC 20
Commodore and other manufacturers sell a signal level converter that
is installed in the User Port Connector on the rear of the computer.
The converter changes the computer's internal TTL voltage levels to
the proper RS-232-C voltage levels and polarities. Unless you are
very familiar with the inner workings of your computer, you should
purchase a level converter rather than trying to â€˜do it yourself.
IBM PCjr
The PCjr uses standard RS>232-C voltage levels; however, the connector
is not standard and is sometimes hard to find. Pin-out information
can be found in the IBM PCjr Technical Reference Manual.
Some computer dealers sell an â€˜IBM PCjr Adapter Cable for Serial De-
vicesâ€˜ that converts the connector on the PCjr to standard RS-232C.
The cable is attached directly between the PCjr and the PK-88. The
cable is only about three inches long; you may want to get a male-to-
female RS-232C extension cable.
2-l8 PK88-36

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.ll.A
2.11.5
2.ll.6
Tandy Color Computer
The CoCo series (except for the Micro Color Computer) uses a 4-pin DIN
connector for its serial interface. Wire a cable as shown below.
CoCo PK-88 (D825?)
k .. ... 2
2 .. ... 3
3 ..... ...... ... 7
Tandy Model 100/102, Kyocera KC-85 and NEC 8201
The Model 100/102, Kyocera KC<85 and NBC 8201 have built-in RS-232C
serial ports compatible with the PK-88. You will need a standard male
to-male RS-232C extension cable to connect the computer and the PK-88
Other Computers with 25-Pin RS-232-C Ports
If your computer has an RS-232C port, consult your manual to see which
pins are used for Send data, Receive data and signal common. Read the
instructions for connecting a modem and connect the PK-88 the same way
The PK-88 is configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE), the
technical term for an RS>232C modem. Most computers and terminals are
configured as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).
o If your computer is configured as DTE:
Wire pin 2 of the PK-88 connector to pin 2 of the computerâ€™:
RS>232C port, pin 3 to pin 3 and pin 7 to pin 7. Use a standard
3â€”wire male-to-female or male-to-male RS-232C extension cable.
o If your computer is configured as DCE:
Wire pin 2 of the
Wire pin 2 of the
Wire pin 7 to pin
Some computers require
signal. Others may require connections for pin 8 and pin 20. You can
PK-88 to pin 3 of the computer connector.
computer connector to pin 3 of the PK-88.
7.
pin 5 of to be connected to an appropriate
use the computer's output signals on pins b and 6 as indicated below:
PK-88 COMPUTER
2 . . . . . . .
..
3 ...
7 ... . . . .
..
2-19
2
3
7
b
5
6
8
20
PK88-37

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.11.7
2.12
2.12.1
Other Computers with Non-Standard Serial Ports
Computers with non>standard serial ports must meet the following con-
ditions:
o Signal levels must be compatible with RS-2326 or CCITT Recommend-
ations V.24/V.28. The PK-88 requires the voltage levels from the
computer be greater than about +3 volts in one state and less
than O volts in the other state.
o Signal polarity must conform to the RS-232C/V.24/V.28 standard.
The low-voltage state must correspond to logical '1'; the high-
voltage state to logical '0.â€˜
o The computer must be able to correctly receive signals that meet
RS-232C/V.2b/V.2B specifications. The PK-88 meets these specifi-
cations.
Make or buy a cable that provides the following connections:
o The computer's serial port common pin must be connected to the
PK-88's serial port connector pin 7.
0 The pin on which the computer SENDS data must be connected to the
PK-88's connector pin 2.
o The pin on which the computer RECEIVES data must be connected to
the PK-88's connector pin 3.
If your computer requires any other signals, you must arrange to pro-
vide them. The documentation provided with your computer or serial
card should clarify any special requirements.
Terminal (Modem) Software for Specific Computers
Any communications program that enables your computer to emulate or
act as an ASCII terminal with a telephone modem should work with the
PK-88. If you have a familiar program you have used successfully, use
it to communicate with the PKâ€”88.
Apple Macintosh
Apple dealers sell a communications program called 'MacTerm' that will
work well with the PK-88. Set the program options as listed below:
COMPATIBILITY:
1200 bauds, 7 bits/character, even parity, Handshake XON/XOFF,
Modem connection, 'telephone' port
TERMINAL:
VTIOO, ANSI, UNDERLINE, US, 80 columns, ON LINE, AUTOREPEAT.
2~20 PK88-38

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.12.2
2.12.3
2.l2.h
2.12.5
2.12.6
2.12.7
Apple II, II+, IIE and IIC
The PK-88 operates well with the Apple II family of computers using
both Apple-supplied and third-party serial interface cards. Terminal
programs used successfully include ASCII EXPRESS PRO, Hayes SMARTCOMM
IIE, Modem Manager and DataCapture k.0
Commodore 6b, 64C, I28, Vic 20
AEA's program COM-PAKRATT will work with the Commodore 64 and 128
series of computers. COM-PAKRATT will pg; work with the VIC-20.
A BASIC communications program is printed in the Programmer's
Egï¬�egence Guide published by Commodore. Use the program listing for
â€˜True ASCIIâ€˜; Commodore computers use a modified ASCII format
internally. We suggest you operate the PK-B8 at 300 bauds with these
computers to avoid possible data speed difficulties.
IBM PCjrTM
The PCjr's BASIC cartridge contains a terminal program. Start the
program by typing 'TERM.' Refer to the PCjr's BASIC manual for det-
ails on the program. For best results with the PCjr do not run the
PK-88â€˜s serial port baud rate faster than 1200 bauds.
Tandy Color Computer
Several terminal programs are available for the CoCo. We suggest that
you use a commercial program rather than writing your own. The CoCo's
â€˜software UARTâ€˜ may be difficult to program in BASIC.
Tandy Model 100/102, Kyocera KC-B5 and NEC 8201
These portable computers have built-in terminal programs in ROM. Con-
sult the computer documentation for instructions in their use.
IBM PCs, â€˜Clonesâ€™ and True Compatibles
AEA's PC-PAKRATT will work with the PK-88 and the IBM-PC, AT and true
compatibles. There are also many commercial, â€˜sharewareâ€™ and public-
domain communications and terminal programs available for the IBM PC
family and compatible MS-DOS computers. Almost any of these programs
can be used successfully with the PK-88.
Specialized terminal programs for packet radio and electronic mail or
packet bulletin board service can be found throughout the packet radio
community and can be downloaded from Compuserve, GEnie and from many
telephone bulletin boards.
A partial list of terminal and BBS programs tested successfully with
the PK-88 includes:
PCPAKRAT, PROCOMM, PROCOWM-PLUS, CROSSTALK, SMARTCOM, RELAY, CTERM,
QMODEM, PC-TALK, HAMCOM, PK232COM, ASCII EXPRESS, BITCOM, PACKCOMM,
PACKTAIK, HAMPAC, MACPAC, YAPP, WA7MBL V3.x/h.x/5.x, WORLI Vb.5/6.03,
KAZBQE PRMBS V0.97u, ACAX MPC Vk.03, and others.
2-2l PK88-39

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL INSTALLATION
2.13
2.13.1
PBBS, Electronic Mail and File Server Program Compatibility
The PK-88 can be used successfully with a variety of electronic mail
programs, as well as with several PBBS (Packet Bulletin Board) pro-
grams written for the PC/MS-DOS computers. The PK-88 operates with
BBS programs by WORLI, VESGYQ, WA7MBL, KAZBQE, AC4X and others.
Please consult the authors of these applications programs directly for
information on operating the PK-88 with their programs. Our Customer
Service Department cannot provide this information.
The PK-88 also performs well with several applications that use the
TCP/IP suite of protocols written by KA9Q for the PC/MS-DOS computers,
available in the packet radio community. See Chapter 6 for details
on Host Mode, KISS TNC, TOP/IF and other special applications.
The following default parameters should be considered as initial or
experimental settings for these host applications:
PBBS Programs TCP[lP Suite (KAQQQ
8BITCONV
ACRDISP
ALFDISP
AWLEN
AX25L2V2
CANLINE
CANPAC
CHSWITCH
DELETE
ECHO
FLOW
NEWMODE
NOMODE
PARITY
RELINK
START
STOP
TXFLOW
XFLOW
XOFF
XON
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Requirements
ON
0
OFF
8
ON
$00
$00
$00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
0
OFF
$00
$00
OFF
OFF
$00
$00
AWLEN 8
CONHODE TRANS
HID OFF
HPOLL OFF
KISS ON
PARITY 0
PPERSIST ON
RAWHDLC ON
START $00
STOP $00
TRACE OFF
XON $00
XOFF $00
XFLOW OFF
HOST ON (Must
be last!)
Certain host computer application programs require that Pin 8, â€˜DCD'
(Data Carrier Detect) be asserted during connected state. In such
cases, Pin 8 must be wired between the computer and the PK-88.
The PK-88's jumper JP3 must be set to force Pin 8 to follow the
PKâ€”88's connect status. This requires a change from the factory-set
jumper position. See paragraph 2.8.2 for jumper JP3 details.
2-22 PK88-#0

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.1
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2.3
CHAPTER 3
BASIC OPERATION
Exploring the PK-88 Program
This chapter shows you how to use the PK-88, describes the keyboard
commands you will use to â€˜talkâ€™ to the PK-88, and the answers, prompts
and error messages you will receive from the PK-88.
LED Status and Mode Indicators
The PK-88's front-panel LEDs show you the operating mode and status at
any moment. Each LED is marked with an abbreviated name. Scan the
PK-88's front panel as we review the LEDs and their meanings.
The following LEDs show the operating mode:
CONV Converse Lit when in Converse Mode
TRANS Transparent Lit when in Transparent Mode
CMD Command Lit when in Command Mode
Status indicator LEDs
The following LEDs show system status:
SEND Send Lit when PTT line is enabled
DCD Data Carrier Detect Lit when receiving signal
STA Status Lit when unacknowledged frames exist, or
blinks when the Mai1Drop has messages
not yet read by the owner (HYCALL)
CON Connected Lit when valid connect state exists
MULT Multiple Lit when multiple connection exists, or
blinks when the receive buffer is full.
The DCD LED - Data Carrier Detect
The DCD LED is an indicator of channel activity. When another station
transmits, the DCD LED on the PK-88 should light for the duration of
the received packet frame. If the DCD LED is lit by random noises,
reduce your receiver's output volume control until the LED goes out.
Valid packets received should always light the DCD LED.
LEDs at System Start
After the PK-88 has been initialized at system start, or each time you
type RESTART, the PK-88 should be in command mode.
CHD lit The PK-88 is in Command Mode.
3-1 PKB8-41

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Commands
The PK-88 Packet Radio Controller is a command-driven system. All
control functions are performed by typing single- and multiple-chab
acter commands from your computer's keyboard. Menus are not used.
Commands can specify the variable values of the parameters that affect
the PK-8B's operation and its performance during specific actions.
Entering Commands
Commands are entered after the Command Mode prompt: cmd:
ill: Type <CTRL-C> if 'cmd:' is not displayed.
You will use English-like words or abbreviations to change the value
of parameters and issue instructions to the PK-88.
o Commands are keywords or mnemonics (abbreviations that trigger
your memory) composed of strings of characters typed by the user.
You will probably never change the values of some parameters; however,
they give each user the flexibility to adapt the PK-88 to the local
environment and operating conditions.
o Use either UPPER CASE (capital letters) or lower case (small let-
ters) when entering commands.
o End the command with a carriage return <CR>. Carriage returns
are not shown in the examples below.
o Correct your typing mistakes or cancel the line completely before
you type the final <CR> of your command.
o See Chapter 3 for a discussion of line editing.
Command Responses
Whenever the PK~8B accepts a command that changes a value, the PK-88
responds with the previously stored value (unless BBSMSGS is set ON,
in which case the previous value or state is not shown). For example,
while in the Command mode, if you type
cmdzxflow off
and 'XFLOW' was 'ON' you'll see the display
XFLOW was ON
XFUDW now OFF
This message tells you that the value has been changed successfully.
3-2 Pl(88~42

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.3
3.3.b
Error Messages
If the PK-88 cannot understand what you have typed, you'll receive an
error message in English telling you the nature of the error.
0 If you type an unrecognized command:
7What?
0 If the command name is correct, but the arguments are wrong:
Ybad
o If you type a numerical value that is not within the proper range
?range
o If you set the BEACON timing too often for busy channels:
WARNING: BEACON too often
Here are a few more examples:
cmd:ASDFASDF
?Hhat? This is not a recognized command.
cmd:BEACON E
?bad A parameter was left out.
cmd:PACLEN 265
?range Unacceptable numerical value.
cmd:DAY
?clock not set You did not set the PK~88's clock.
Command Names
The command name is the full word or character string you can type to
tell the PK-88 to execute this command. You can command the PK-88 by
typing a minimum abbreviation called a 'mnemonic' instead of the full
word. You may always type out the entire command word, or any abbre-
viation longer than the minimum abbreviation. For example:
o The command MYCALL can be entered by simply typing â€˜MY.â€™
(Note: DO NOT type the â€˜quotation marksâ€˜ - we show these for
clarity in identifying the letters you will type.)
The abbreviation 'M' is not enough (and will be interpreted as another
command), but â€˜MY,â€™ â€˜MYC,' 'MYCA,' 'MYCAL' or 'HYCALL' are acceptable.
If a command requires parameters, the type of parameter is indicated
after the command name as well as the default value. For example, â€˜nâ€™
means that the command takes a numerical parameter value.
3Â»3 PK88-43

PK-BB OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.3.5
3.3.6
Default Values
Most commands have initial values that the PK-88 assumes as defaults
or values suitable for the â€˜average caseâ€™, or â€˜used most often.â€˜
These defaults are stored in EPROM and loaded into RAM when the system
is first powered up - or when you give the RESET comand.
Parameters, Arguments and Values
Some commands need additional information before they can be executed.
This type of command has â€˜parametersâ€™ or requires â€˜arguments.â€™
For example, the command FULLDUP has a Boolean (YES/NO) parameter:
o The value that fills this parameter is either ON or OFF. You can
also use YES for ON and NO for OFF. You can also use â€˜Tâ€™ to
"toggle" the state of the parameter.
When you type FULLDUP ON, FULLDUP is the command, ON is its argument -
the value you want the PK-88 to use to execute the command FULLDUP.
o Immediate commands such as ID have no parameters. Typing only
'ID' causes the PK-38 to execute the command (if HID is ON).
Some commands such as CONNECT have optional parameters.
o If you enter CONNECT without an argument, the PK-88 displays the
current status of the link.
However, if you enter CONNECT WXIAAA, the PK-88 issues the connect re-
quest and tries to establish the link to WXIAAA.
Some commands such as MFILTER can use several arguments at the same
time. MFILTER accepts from 1 to 4 numerical arguments. You can type
MFILTER 12 or MFILIER 12, 26. Both are legal commands.
Three different types of parameters are used: Boolean, numeric, and
text or string.
Qoolean Parameters
Boolean parameters have only two possible values: ON or OFF, YES or
NO, or EVERY or AFTER. When a parameter is Qgolegg its two possible
choices are shown separated by a vertical bar. These values can be
"toggledâ€œ, or alternately switched by typing simply â€˜Tâ€™ after the
command name.
Numeric Parameters
A parameter designated as Lgl is a numeric value. Numeric values can
be entered as decimal numbers, or optionally as hexadecimal numbers.
When entering a hexadecimal number, you must prefix the number you
type with a '$â€˜ character.
3-4 PK88-Ab

The PK-88 displays some of these numeric parameters (those which set
special characters) in hexadecimal format. Here is a brief explana-
tion of 'hex' numbers:
The â€˜digitsâ€™ of a hex number represent powers of l6 in the same manner
as the powers of 10 represented by a decimal number. The decimal num-
bers l0 through 15 are hexadecimal digits A through F. For example:
$lB â€” (l x 16) + (ll x l) - 27 (decimal)
$120 â€” (l x 256) + (2 x 16) + (0 x 1) â€” 288 (decimal)
Text Q; String Parameters
A parameter designated as text, such as the argument or 'message' for
CTEXT ('connect' message), or the HDPROMPT command prompt in the
MailDr0p, can be entered in any combination of upper and lower case.
A text parameter can include numbers, spaces, and punctuation. The
text is accepted exactly as you type it
Some commands require gall signs as parameters. Such parameters are
usually call signs, but may be any string of numbers and at least one
letter, up to six characters. The character strings identify stations
sending and receiving packets.
A call sign can also include a substation identifier (SSID), a decimal
number from 0 to 15 used to distinguish two or more stations on the
air with the same call sign (such as a base station, a digital repeat-
er or â€˜digipeaterâ€˜, or a packet switch or node).
The call sign and SSID are entered and displayed as â€˜call-n.â€˜ If an
SSID is not entered, the system sets it to O (zero); SSID '0' is not
displayed by the PK-88.
Certain commands have parameters which are lists of call signs:
o The MFROM and HTO commands allow you to specify from one to eight
call signs for selective monitoring.
o You must separate multiple call sign lists with either blank
spaces or commas.
Some examples will help you understand these explanations.
o BEACON EVERYIAFTER 'n'
The BEACON command requires both Boolean and numeric arguments. You
must specify either EVERY or AFTER (abbreviated to E or A), followed
by an argument 'n' chosen from some range of values.
An appropriate entry would be BEACON EVERY l8O (this tells the PK-88
to send a beacon every l8O X 10 seconds, every 30 minutes), or BEACON
EVERY 0 (tells the PK-88 to never send the beacon at all).
3-5 PK88-AS

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.3.7
3.h
3.b
o CONNECT calll [VIA call2[,call3...,cal19]]
The CONNECT command requires a string argument 'call1.â€˜
You may include the keyword VIA, followed by a list of from one to
eight call signs, 'call2' through 'call9.'
Multiple call signs in the list mgst be separated by commas or spaces.
An acceptable entry would be:
cmd:C WXIAAA V WX1BBB,WXlCCC
Using Commands Without Arguments
If you type a command name without an argument, the current value of
the command's arguments is displayed. For example:
cmd:mdigi Command typed without argument
MDIGI ON Displays the present value.
cmd:MDICI Y Sets the value to YES (ON)
MDIG1 was OFF Displays the previous value
MDIGI now ON Displays the new value
NOTE: The DISPLAY command shows you the values of all parameters or
groups of related parameters.
Controller Messages
The PK-88 will frequently send you messages during normal operating
sessions. This section shows you typical messages and discusses the
circumstances under which they can appear.
General Messages
ABA PK-B8 Packet Controller
AX.25 Level 2 Version 2.0
Copyright (C) 1986, l987, 1988 by
Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.
Release 29.APR.88 +
Checksum $D9
This â€˜sign-onâ€˜ message appears when you apply power to the PK-88, or
when you issue the RESTART and RESET commands. The release date will
change in each new firmware release. The checksum is a hexadecimal
number that verifies the firmware version you are using is working.
PK-88 is using default values.
This message appears with the sign-on message shown above if the
batteries are not installed (or have failed). You will see this
message the first time you apply power to the PK-88. This message
also appears if the PK-88 loads the defaults in response to the RESET
command, or when the firmware version is changed.
3-6 PK88-Ã©6

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.b.2
cmd:
This Command Mode prompt tells you that the PK-88 is waiting for you
to issue a command. Anything you type after this prompt is read as a
command to the PK~88. If a monitored packet is being shown, the
prompt may not be visible, even though you are in Command Mode. The
front panel 'CMD' LED also indicates if the PK-88 is in Command Mode.
?What?
The PK-88 did not understand what you typed. Anytime you give the
PK-88 a command it does not understand, a ?What? will be displayed.
W35
DOW
The previous and current values are displayed whenever you change the
value of one of the PK-88's parameters (unless BBSMSGS is set ON).
The gag and ggg responses confirm that the PK-88 properly interpreted
your command, and remind you of what you have done.
Command Mode Error Messages
If you make a mistake typing a command to the PK~B8, an error message
is displayed. Depending on the type of error you have made, you may
see the following messages:
?bad
You typed a command correctly, but the parameters, arguments or values
in the command line could not be interpreted.
YVIA
You typed more than one call sign for the CONNECT or UNPROTO commands
without the VIA keyword.
?callsign
You typed a call sign in a manner that does not meet the PK-88's re-
quirements for call signs. A call sign may be any string of numbers
and letters, including at least one letter. Punctuation and spaces
are not allowed. Any substation ID used must be a decimal number from
O to 15, separated from the call by a hyphen.
7clock not set
You typed the command DAYTIME, but you had not previously set the
clock. DAYTIME sets the clock if it is typed with the daytime
parameters, and displays the time if it is typed without parameters.
?not enough
You did not type enough arguments for a command that expects several
parameters.
3-7 PK88-47

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.4.3
?need ALL/NONE/YES/NO
You did not type the arguments needed for GFROM, DFROM, HFROM and MTO.
?too many
You typed too many arguments for a command that expects several para-
meters. For example, MFILTER can have up to A arguments.
cmdimfilter $lB,$OC,$1A,$O3,$O7
?too many
?too long
You typed too long a command line; the line was ignored. This happens
if you type a BTEXT or CTEXT message of more than 120 characters.
?not while connected
You tried to change MYCALL or AX25L2V2 while already connected or
while trying to establish a connection.
too many packets outstanding
This message appears after leaving CONVERSE or TRANS command if you
have already typed packet data, filled the transmit buffer and then
tried to return to the Data Mode. You can only enter the mode after
some of the packets have been successfully transmitted.
Link Status Messages
Link status messages show the status of packet AX.25 connections in
which the PK~B8 is involved. You can ask for link status at any time
from the Command Mode by typing the CONNECT command without parameters
If you type a CONNECT command while the PK-88 is in connected state,
your monitor will display the link status.
The following messages appear in response to the CONNECT command.
Link state is: CONNECTED to calll
[VIA call2[,cal13...,cal19]]
Your station is connected to a distant station. The message shows the
digipeater path in use, if any.
Link state is: DISCONNECTED
There is no link or connection at this time.
Link state is: CONNECT in progress
You typed a connect request, but the acknowledgment from the distant
station has not been received. If you type the DISCONNE command, the
connect process will be canceled.
3Â»8 PK88-68

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
Link state is: DISCONNECT in progress
You typed a disconnect request, but the acknowledgment from the dis-
tant station has not been received. If you type the DISCONNE command
again the PK-88 is disconnected immediately.
Link state is: FRMR in progress
The PK-88 is connected to a distant station but a protocol error has
occurred. This should never happen when AEA AX.25 systems are con-
nected. An improper implementation of the AX.25 protocol could cause
this condition. The PK-88 will try to resynchronize frame numbers
with the distant TNC, although a disconnect may result. Connections
are invalid in this state.
The PK~88 tells you whenever the link status changes. Link status may
change in response to a command given the PK-88 (CONNECT or DISCONNE),
a connect or disconnect request packet from a distant station, a dis-
connect resulting from exceeding the retry count, an automatic time-
out disconnect (CHECK), or a protocol error.
*** CONNECTED to: calll [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]
This message appears when the PK-88 changes from the â€˜disconnectedâ€™ or
â€˜connect in progressâ€˜ state to the connected state. The connection
may be a result of a CONNECT command typed by you, or a connect re-
quest packet received from a distant station.
*** Connect request: calll [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]
The PK-88 has received but not accepted a connect request from a dis-
tant station. This can happen if you have set CFROM to NONE, or if
you are already connected to another station. When the PK-88 displays
this message, it also sends a DH packet (busy signal) to the station
that initiated the connect request.
*** DISCONNECTED: <call sign>
The PK-88 has changed to the disconnected state from any other link
state. This message may be preceded by a message explaining the rea-
son for the disconnect, as shown below.
*** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTED: <call sign>
The PK-88 has disconnected because of a retry failure rather than a
disconnect request from one of the stations.
*** <call sign> busy
*** DISCONNECTED: <call sign>
Your connect request was rejected by a DM packet (busy signal) from
the other station. The PK-88 rejects connect requests if CFROM is set
to NONE, or if you are already connected to another station.
3-9 PK88-49

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
FRMR sent: xx xx xx
The PK-88 is connected but a protocol error has occurred. The PK-88
has sent a special FRMR packet and is trying to resynchronlze frame
numbers with the distant station. The string xxxxxx is replaced with
the hex codes for the three bytes sent in the information part of the
FRMR frame. This message will not appear if the PK-88 is in Transpar-
ent Hode.
I-â€˜RMR rcvd: xx xx xx
The PK-88 has received an FRMR protocol error described above. This
message will not appear if the PK-88 is in Transparent Mode.
3.5 Special Keyboard Control Codes
Special uses have been assigned to certain keyboard characters. These
characters are usually typed from the Command Mode. See the Command
Summary in Chapter 7 for details on these control key commands.
canu NE CTRL-X $18
caumc CTRL-Y s 19
COMMAND CTRL- c $03
mass cnu.-v $16
REDISPLA CTRL-R $12
ssuomc CTRL-M $00
START CTRL-Q $11
stop c'r1u.- s $13
â€˜rm:-: CTRL-T $11Â»
xorr CTRL- s $13
xon CTRL-Q $11
3. 6 Clear String Commands
The following commands can be cleared while in Command Mode by typing
the command word followed by a single percent sign (\), an ampersand
(&) or â€˜N,â€™ 'NO,' â€˜NONE,â€™ â€˜OFFâ€™ as the c0mmand's argument.
BTEXT CFROM CTEXT DFROM HBX Ml-â€˜ROM
Ml-IEARD MTO HYALIAS
3.7 Detailed Command Descriptions
Chapter 5, Command Summary, presents detailed descriptions of each
command contained in the PK-88's operating system software. You will
find more information on the meaning, use and effects of each command,
its parameters and mnemonics, default values and arguments. Examples
of command usage are included.
3-10 PK88- 50

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.1.1
3.8
3.8.1.3
3.8.l.b
General Operating Information
Before discussing the specifics of each the PK-88's operating modes,
here are some command concepts applicable to all packet modes.
Formatting Commands
These commands affect transmitted or displayed signals, or both.
Screen Line Length (ACRDISP n)
The ACRDISP command (default 80) formats your computer's screen dis-
play. A <CR> (or <CR><LF> sequence when ALFDISP is ON) is sent to
your computer at the end of a line when â€˜nâ€™ characters have been dis-
played.
o If your computer formats or wraps output lines, set ACRDISP to
zero (0) to disable the PK-88's word-wrap function.
Monitor Echo (ECHO)
The ECHO command controls local echo by the PK-88 except in Transpar-
ent Mode. If the characters you type are correctly displayed, the
ECHO function is set properly.
o If you do not see your typing on your display, set ECHO to ON.
o If you see each typed character doubled, set ECHO to OFF.
Line Feed (<CTRL-J>)
<CTRL-J> is part of the standard terminal keyboard 'RETURN' or â€˜ENTERâ€™
key operation and is normally sent with a carriage return.
You can insert '<CTRL-J>' in any text where you need an isolated line
feed function without an associated carriage return. This is known as
an â€˜indexâ€™ function in word processing, and can be useful when format-
ting text files in your buffers.
Carriage Return (<CTRL-M>)
<CTRL-M> is part of the standard terminal keyboard 'RETURN' or â€˜ENTERâ€™
key operation and is normally transmitted together with a line feed.
You can insert '<CTRL-M>' in any text where you need an isolated car-
riage return function without an associated line feed. This is also
known as a â€˜Zero-Index Carriage Return (ZICR)' function in word pro-
cessing, and can be useful when formatting text files in your message
buffers.
3-ll PK88-51

PK>88 OPERATING MANUAL BASIC OPERATION
3.8.1.5
3.9
3.10
3.11
Backspace and Delete (<DEL>)
Use your keyhoard's <BACKSPACE> to backspace. Depending on how you
have set the 'BKONDEL' and 'DELETE' parameters, your BACKSPACE key may
be a â€˜destructiveâ€™ backspace key.
o If 'DELETE' is ON, typing <BACKSPACE> erases the characters from
the screen and from the transmit buffer as well.
Escape Functions (<ESC>)
The echoed ESCAPE character can be either your keyboard's ESCAPE ($15.
ASCII 27) key, or the '$' dollar sign character ($24, ASCII 36). The
default is the ESCAPE key.
This option is provided because some terminals and computer terminal
emulator programs may interpret the ESCAPE character as a special com-
mand prefix. These terminals change display functions depending on
the characters that follow the ESCAPE key.
0 If your computer presents this problem, set ESCAPE to ON.
o See the MFILTER and AFILTER commands which lets you strip or
filter out any received characters and prevent them from reaching
your computer or terminal.
Send Time of Day (<CTRL-T>)
Use the character specified by the TIME command (default <CTRL-T>) to
insert the time of day in the text you type into the transmit buffer,
or into a text file stored on disk.
The PKâ€”88 reads the control code and sends the time to your radio in
the data transmission code in use at that time, in format HH:MM, where
'HH' is the hour in the 24-hour system and â€˜MMâ€™ is the minute.
o If DAYSTAMP is ON the date is included with the time.
Clear Transmit Buffer (TCLEAR)
Use the TCLEAR command to clear the PK-88's transmit buffer and cancel
any further transmission of data.
Type 'TCLEAR' or â€˜TCâ€™ followed by a <RETURN>.
0 You must be in the Command Mode to use TCLEAR.
o Use <CTRL-C> (default) command to return to Command Mode.
o Type 'TCLEAR <RETURN>' or â€˜TC <RETURN>' to clear the transmit
buffer.
3Â»l2 PK88-52

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.1
4.1.1
CHAPTER k
PACKET OPERATION
General Information
This section describes basic packet operation. For your first packet
practice, the PK-88 is connected in a 'loopback' circuit so that it
â€˜talks to itself.â€˜ You will have a chance become familiar with packet
operation before you actually go on the air.
We will describe commands used for routine packet operations. These
commands will get you ready for the section, â€˜Your First Packet Ses-
sion.â€˜ The â€˜Special Input Charactersâ€™ section contains information on
editing from your keyboard and special characters used by the PK-88.
Most commands can be abbreviated by typing only the first two or three
characters. The mnemonics or minimum abbreviations for each command
are shown in Chapter 5, the â€˜Command Summaryâ€˜ chapter, along with a
full description of each command.
The PK-88 automatically enters the Command Mode when you first apply
power. If you have been in any other mode, type â€˜CONTROL-Câ€™ followed
by a <RETURN>. The PK-88 answers with the following prompt:
cmd:
Change Radio Link Data Rate
The PK-88 provides radio link rates of 45, 50, 57, 75, 100, 110, 150,
200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 6800, 9600 and 19,200 BPS. The default
data rate is set at the factory for 1200 BPS.
Use the HBAUD command from Command Mode to read or change the packet
link data rate.
To read the present baud rate, type â€˜HBAUD <RETURN>' or â€˜H5 <RETURN>.'
The PK*88 responds with:
HBAUD 1200
To change the link rate, type 'HBAUD' followed two or three digits and
a <RETURN>.
cmd:HBAUD 300<RETURN>
The PK-88 accepts the new baud rate and, if BBSMSGS is OFF, responds
with the old baud rate:
HBAUD was 1200
HBAUD now 300
The number you enter becomes the new data rate and replaces the value
previously stored in RAM. You can also change the baud rate one step
at a time. For up type â€˜H5 Uâ€˜ and for down type â€˜HE Dâ€˜.
A-l PK85-53

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
A.l.2
h.1.2.1
h.l.2.2
4.1.2.3
h.2
Station Identification
Use the MYCALL command to install your call sign in the PK-88's memory
(see next section). The PK-B8 will ggg key your transmitter until
you've changed the MYCALL default "PK88â€œ to a valid call sign.
MYCALL Required at System Start-Up
When you start the PK-88 for the first time, the system parameters are
loaded from EPRQH. MYCALL is initialized using "PK88" as its default.
You muÂ§C use the MYCALL command to install your call sign in the 88.
You ganngt operate until you have done this. If you try to connect to
a station without installing your call sign, the PK-88 will not
transmit, but instead sends you this error message:
Yneed MYCALL
Substation Identifiers (SSIDs)
You can identify additional stations with the Secondary Station ID, or
SSID - a number from 0 to 15, appended to the call sign by a dash:
cmd:MYCALL WXIXXX
If you do not specify the SSID extension, the PK~88 retains its
default value of zero (0) and the SSID is not displayed. You must
specify the SSID to connect to a station with a SSID other than 0 or
use such a station as a digipeater:
cmd:CONNECT WXIXXX-2 (or)
cmd:CONNECT WXIAAA VIA WXZBBB-2
Automatic Identification
The PK-88 can send an automatic identification (ID) packet every 9.5
minutes when your station is a digipeating. You can turn this feature
on with the command HID ON. ID packets are displayed like this:
wx1>oo<>1n:wx1xxx digipeater (or)
wx1xxx>1n; (MYALIAS), wx1xxx digipeater
when you shut down, you can command a final ID with the ID command.
Set Up Loopback Test Circuit
Do these steps in the exact order shown:
-|>w~vâ€”1
Get the shielded radio cable you set aside in Chapter 2.
Strip and tin the wires at the radio end of the cable.
Join the wires coming from pins 2 and 8.
Insert the eight-pin plug end of the cable into the J2 connector
on the PK-88's rear panel.
You have connected the PK-88's transmit audio output to its receive
audio input. The PK-88 can now â€˜talk to itselfâ€˜ in â€˜loopback.â€™
A-2 PKBB-54

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
le.2.l
14.2.2
4.3
10.3.1
â€˜Connect ' and ' Disconnectâ€˜
Packet radio contacts begin with a connect process that sets up the
'handshakingâ€˜ between the two stations to insure error-free co|m||unica'
tions. Contacts or connections are ended by a discogggcg process that
leaves both stations free to start new contacts.
Packet connections can also use digipeaters - other packet stations
that automatically relay packets from one station to another over a
specified route. We are going to 'c0nnect' the PK-88 to itself to see
how this works. You have already set up the PK-88 in loopback; there-
fore, the PK-88 will receive as well as send packets.
LED Status and Mode Indicators
The PK-88's front-panel LEDs show you the operating mode and system
status at any moment. Each LED is marked with an abbreviated name.
CONV Converse Lit when in the Converse Mode
TRANS Transparent Lit when in the Transparent Mode
CMD Command Lit when in the Command Mode
SEND Send Lit when PTT line is active
DC!) Data Carrier Detect Lit when valid data signals received
STA Status Lit when unacknowledged frames exist
(Blinks when Mailbrop has unread mail)
Lit when valid connection exists
Lit when multiple connection exists
(Blinks when receive buffer is full)
Lit when DC power is applied
CON Connect
MULT Mul tiple
PWR Power
System Loopback Test Connection
This first test uses your own call sign. Type â€˜CONNECT (HYCALL)'
cmd:CONNECT (HYCALL)
*=~* commcrzn to (HYCALL)
The LEDs change to show the PK-88 in Packet Mode, in CONNECTED state
and in CONVERSE Mode.
STATUS: CONV lit, CON lit
The PK-88 sends special packets to set up a connection. These packets
are now leaving the PK-88 on J3â€˜s Pin 1 and returning on Pin /4 without
being transmitted over your radio.
Connect Message
*** CONNECTED to MYCALL shows that the connection is established. The
CON LED is now lit; the cmd: prompt does not appear on the next line.
You are cgnnegged Q yourself in Converse Mode, ready to begin. Try
it. Type your message, ending the line with a <CR>:
Hello. there.
Hello, there, (Underscore here indicates received data)
lo-3 PK88-55

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.3
4.3
A.3.b
b.3.5
Send Packet Character
<CR> tells the PK-88 to assemble your typed characters in a packet and
transmit them. (We will explain how to use a different character to
send packets in Chapter 5, the â€˜Command Summaryâ€™ chapter.) In the
Converse Mode, everything you type is assembled into packets and sent
to the station to which you are connected. If a connect does not
exist, the packet is addressed to CQ or whatever address you have
typed into the UNPROT0 field.
Return to Command Mode
The PK-88 automatically enters Converse Mode when the connection is
established. Type '<CTRL<C>' (or whatever character you previously
set ($00-$7F)) to return to Command Mode. The PK-88 does not echo the
<CTRL-C>, but you should immediately see the Command Mode cmd: prompt.
You can return to Command Mode with the <BREAK> key. BREAK is a break
in transmission (not an ASCII character) - your keyboard may have it.
If <CTRL-C> interferes with or stops your terminal program and you
cannot send the BREAK signal, change the character that returns you to
Command Mode. See â€˜COMMANDâ€™ in Chapter 5, the â€˜Command Summaryâ€˜.
Return to Converse Mode
Type 'CONVERSEâ€˜ to return to Converse Mode.
<CTRLâ€”C>
cmd:CONVERSE
Whatever I type in Converse Mode is transmitted.
Whatever 1 type in Converse Mode is transmitted,
<CTRL-C>
cmd:
Terminate the Link - Disconnect
Type 'DISCONNEâ€˜ (or 'D') to terminate the link or connection. The
PK-88 transmits a special packet that ends the contact and notifies
you when the link is disconnected:
cmd:DISCONNE
*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
An actual communication may be terminated by the other station. In
that case, you will see the *** DISCONNECTED (call sign) message with~
out having typed the command at your station.
You have now accomplished the basic operations of a packet contact:
o You connected to the desired station to begin the contact.
o You sent and received messages.
o You disconnected from the station at the end of the contact.
4-A PK88-56

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
h.4
4.5.1
b.A.2
Your First Packet Communication Session
There are more features you should be familiar with for comfortable
packet operation - but you probably want to begin using the PK-88.
If possible, get help from an experienced packet operator to get you
started. Be sure that the distant station is close enough to ensure
good noise-free reception for your first â€˜on-the-airâ€™ communication.
System Cable and Switch Check
Before actually trying your first connection, take one more minute to
verify your system setup:
1. Verify that the cable from the J2 connector is correctly wired to
your radio's microphone jack.
2. Connect your radio to the PK-88 using the J2 jack.
3. Be sure you have adjusted the PK-88 and your radio using the
installation procedure described earlier in this manual.
Starting the Communication
You are ready to try a connection. We will use HXIAAA in place of
your call sign, and NXlBBB for the distant station's call sign. You
can type upper case or lower case - the PK-88 doesn't care.
Type '<CTRL-C>' to verify that you are in Command Mode. Type â€˜CONNECT
WXlBBB' after the cmd: prompt. After a moment you should see:
cmd:connect wxlbbb
*** CONNECTED to WXIBBB
You have begun your first packet communication. The PK-88 and the
packet controller at the distant station are automatically switched to
Converse Mode. The other station sees:
*** CONNECTED to WXlAAA
Exchange several messages to get the feel of packet radio. Watch your
radio's transmit indicators and, if possible, listen to the audio from
both radios; you will get a better idea of what is happening. Your
radio is inactive most of the time, even while you are typing.
When you reach the end of a line and type <CR>, your radio is keyed
briefly. The distant station hears â€˜brrrraaaapâ€˜ on his speaker. As
your message is displayed on his computer, his radio will be keyed for
an even shorter burst; you will hear 'brraap' on your speaker. This
is the ACK, the packet acknowledgment coming back.
The PK-88 notes that the packet was received correctly, but does not
display anything on your screen. This is normal operation. If your
system still had any unacknowledged packets outstanding, the PK-88's
STA (Status) LED would be lit - but it is not. (Unless you have set
MCON to a value higher than 'b,' your terminal will not display ACK
frames.)
4Â»5 PK8B-57

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.4.3
4.5
4.5.1
What lf....?
If you have trouble connecting, take a few minutes to verify each of
the following items. Verify that;
o The PK<88's AFSK Output Level control, your microphone gain and
deviation are set properly as shown and discussed in Chapter 2.
All cables and connectors are properly installed.
Your radio's volume and squelch are set for local conditions.
You are in Command Mode. (Type '<CTRL-C>' to confirm this)
If the cmd: prompt does not appear, press the PK-88 POWER switch
off and then on again. You should get the normal sign-on message
0 TONE is set to 3 (or 2) for VHF, 0 or l for HF.
o HBAUD is 1200 if on VHF; 300 if on RF.
o CFROM is set to ALL.
0000
Ask one of your area's experienced packet operators to listen to your
transmissions and monitor with his TNC. Both you and the distant
station should set MONITOR and MCON to '5â€˜ or '6', enter Converse Mode
and send some packets. Each station should display packets sent by
the other.
o If only one station is 'hearingâ€˜ properly, verify the modulator
and transmitter of that station and the demodulator and receiver
of the other station.
o Experiment with the TXDELAY timing parameter for the sending TNC.
Set TXDELAY to 60 for a long delay. If this solves the problem,
decrease TXDELAY to the lowest value that works all the time.
Automatic Operation
The PKâ€”8B offers a variety of automatic operating features including
beacon operation, digipeater function and auto-answer messages.
Your packet station can be a digipeater for relaying packets to a more
remote destination. Functions like CONNECT MESSAGE take care of situ-
ations not easily solved in modes other than packet. See the â€˜Command
Summaryâ€˜ chapter for full details on the PK<88's commands.
Beacon Operation
The PK-88 can send an automatic beacon message at specified intervals.
A beacon text can contain special announcements, or the MAIL FOR list
in a bulletin board operation. The values '0â€˜ to '250â€˜ set the beacon
timing in 10-second intervals. '0â€˜ turns off the beacon.
o Set your beacon text using the BTEXT command.
0 Set the beacon timing interval using the BEACON EVERY or BEACON
AFTER command.
For example, to transmit your beacon at 15-minute (15 X 60 seconds)
intervals, type:
omd:BEACON EVERY 90 (Beacon is sent every 900 seconds)
cmd:BEACON EVERY 0 (Beacon is disabled)
b-6 PK88~58

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
Ã©.5.2
EVERY sends your beacon text at regular intervals. AFTER sends your
beacon once after the specified interval after the last packet acti-
vity on the channel.
A beacon frame may be sent directly, and also sent via the digipeat
addresses specified by the UNPROTO command.
Thoughtful beacon timing avoids cluttering the channel with unneces-
sary transmissions. Used with discretion, automatic beacons can be
useful to verify propagation conditions and show usable radio paths.
However, excessive beacons can be a source of interference to traffic
flow. Use your beacon with consideration for others on the channel.
If you set the BEACON timing at a value considered too small for busy
channels (less than '90â€˜), you will see:
WARNING: BEACON too often
This warning appears in the Command Mode each time you type a command
to remind you that your beacon interval may too short; your beacon may
be bothering other channel users and need your attention.
Hill You Accept Connections?
CFROM determines if call requests are accepted or rejected, which
calls are accepted and which are rejected. You can also use synonyms
CONOK ON and CONOK OFF in place of CFROM ALL and CFROM NONE. CFROM
has four arguments: ALL, NONE, YES and NO.
ALL and NONE are used alone in the following manner:
o ALL - the PK-88 accepts connect requests from all callers;
o NONE - the PK-88 rejects connect requests from all callers.
YES and N0 require a list of call signs:
o YES (list) < up to eight call signs whose call requests will be
accepted;
0 N0 (list) - up to eight call signs whose call requests will be
rejected.
CFROM's default argument is ALL. If ALL, the PK-88 will accept con-
nect requests from any station that sends you a connect request.
Type â€˜CFROM NONEâ€˜ or â€˜CONOK OFFâ€™ to reject connect requests from all
stations. If the PKâ€”88 receives a connect request when CFROM is set
to NONE, your monitor displays:
*** Connect request: <call sign>
Your PK-88 sends the calling station a DM packet, or â€˜busy signal.â€˜
The caller sees:
*** moan. busy
*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
4-7 PK88-59

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.5.3
4.5.4
You can set the CFROM field to accept or reject call requests from
specific stations.
To accept calls from one or more stations, type 'CFROM YESâ€˜ (plus a
list of calls signs). Connect requests will be accepted only from
listed callers.
To 531325 calls from one or more stations, type â€˜CFROM NOâ€˜ (plus 3
list of call signs). Connect requests will be rejected only from
stations whose call signs are listed.
Type CFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES list/NO list status.
You can use the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmdzcfrom cmdzcf
CFROM yes NXZBBB WXZCCC "X3066-5 CFROH all
You can include SSIDs as '-n' after the call sign.
o If CFROM is set to N0 HXIAAA or YES WXIAAA, any combination
NXlAAA, WXIAAA-l,...WXlAAA-15 will be matched and processed.
0 If CFROM is set to YES WXlAAA-l or N0 WXIAAA-l, then only
WXlAAA-1 will match and be processed.
You can send your own connect command if you wish to communicate with
the calling station even though his call request has been rejected.
Clear CFROM with '2,â€˜ '&,' or '0FF' as arguments.
Are You Available to Chat?
Set CMSG ON (default is OFF) and use the CTEXT command to enter the
type of message you might put in a telephone answering machine. The
PK-88 automatically sends the CTEXT message to each station that
connects to your system.
The CTEXT message can be any text string up to 120 characters. You
can include <CR>s by prefixing them with the pass character (<CTRL-V>
is the default):
cmd:CTEXT Sorry, I cannot talk right now.<CTRL-V><CR>
I will be on the air again after 8 PM.<CTRL~V><CR>
Joe
CFROM must be set to ALL (default) so that the connection takes place
in order that this message be sent to stations connecting to you.
Do You Want to Transmit?
If you want to leave your station on to monitor and perhaps record the
activity on the channel, but prevent your station from transmitting,
set XMITOK OFF.
Type 'XMITOK OFFâ€˜
4-8 PK88-60

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
Digipeater Details
You may wish to connect to a packet station that is beyond your direct
radio range. If a third packet station is on the air and both you and
the station you want to talk to are in range of that third station,
the third station can relay or 'digipeat' your packets. You set up
the â€˜digipeater' routing when you request the connection. The PK-B8
automatically includes the necessary routing information in the trans~
mitted packets. Here is a sketch that shows how digipeating works:
wxznss
/ \
WXIAAA / \ wx3ccc
You are station WXIAAA - you want to have a packet communication with
WX3CCC. But there is a mountain between you and HX3CCC; you are out of
range of each other. However, you know that there is a packet station
located on the ridge - WXZBBB Y which is in range of you and WXSCCC.
Instruct your PK-88 to set up a connection to WX3CCC using WXZBBB as
an intermediate digipeater. After the cmd: prompt, type: â€˜CONNECT
NX3CCC VIA WXZBBBJ
You can specify a routing list of up to eight intermediate stations.
For example, consider a modification of the example above:
/ \
WXIAAA / \ WX3CCC
HXbDDD . . . . WXSEEE
WXZBBB has turned off his station, but you can still contact WXSCCC by
going around the mountain through WXADDD and WXSEEE like this:
cmd:CONNECT UX3CCC VIA NX4DDD,WX5EEE
Type the digipeaters' call signs in the exact order of the intended
path from your station to the station with which you wish to connect.
Are You a Digipeater?
Your station can be a digipeater for other stations. You do not have
to â€˜doâ€™ anything, Your PK-88 digipeats other stations - unless you
tell it not go! See the DFROM command in the Command Summary chapter.
The default argument of DFROM is ALL. If your transmitter is keyed
when you are not using it, or during lulls in your own conversations,
your PK-B8 is being used as a digipeater by some other stations. This
will not bother your communication with the distant station.
Set MDIGI to ON (default is OFF). The packet headers on your monitor
will show the call signs of the stations that are using your station
as a digipeater, and the data being transmitted through your station.
A-9 PK88-61

PK<88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.6.2
If WRPT is ON (default), you will also see your call sign in the pack~
et header, showing the digipeater path in which you are included. The
call sign of the station whose packet is being decoded is marked with
as asterisk. Assume that your call sign is 'HX2BBBâ€˜. Here's a sample
taken with Monitor 4 (default), MDIGI ON and MRPT ON:
UXlAAA*>NXZBBB>WX3CCCZ
What time is the meeting?
WX3CCC*>WX2BBB>WX1AAA
D0 You Want to be a Digipeatet7
Many operators use their stations as digipeaters to provide a simple
form of packet networking. If local circumstances prevent you from
being a digipeater, you can disable the digipeat function.
DFROM determines ii your station will digipeat other stations, and
which stations packets will be digipeated.
DFROM's default argument is ALL. ALL means that the PKÂ»88 will norm-
ally repeat packets from any station that includes your station's call
sign in their digipeat path.
Type 'DFROM NONEâ€˜ if you do not want to be used as a digipeater.
DFROM works with four arguments: ALL/NONE or YES/NO.
ALL and NONE are used alone and work in the following manner:
o ALL ~ your PK~88 will repeat packets from any station;
o NONE - your PK-88 will not repeat packets from any station.
YES and N0 work with a list of call signs:
o YES (list) - call signs of up to eight stations whose packets
will be repeated;
o N0 (list) - call signs of up to eight stations whose packets will
Qgg be repeated.
Type 'DFROM' to display the ALL/NONE/YES list/NO list status of sta-
tion call signs whose packets will or will not be repeated. You can
use the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmd:dfrom cmd:dÂ£
DFROM all DFROM yes WXIAAA HXZBBB HX3CCC
You can add SSIDs as '-n' after the call sign.
0 If DFROM is set to NO WXlAAA or YES UXIAAA, any combination of
WXlAAA, WXlAAA-1,...WXlAAA-l5 will be matched and processed.
o If DFROM is set to YES WXlAAA-l or N0 WXlAAA-1 then only WXlAAA-1
will match and be processed.
Clear DFROM with '%,' '&,' or â€˜OFF' as the argument.
4-10 PK88-62

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.7
h.7.l
h.8
Unsuccessful Connections and Retries
Sometimes your attempt to connect to another station will fail; the
desired station may not be on the air, it might be out of range, or
you could have typed the other stationâ€˜s call sign incorrectly. If
the distant station does not respond to your first connect request
packet, your PK-88 will try again.
Use the RETRY command to control the number of times the PK-88 will
repeat the connect request. The default value is l0. If your PK-B8
does not get an ACK after that number (RETRY) of repeats, it quits and
shows:
*** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
Retries While Connected
The same RETRY mechanism and count continues after the connection is
established, you are in Converse Mode and the communication has begun.
Each packet frame sent by your PK-88 must be acknowledged or 'ACKed'
by the other station, and vice versa. ACK means that the packet was
received correctly at the distant station; the errorÂ»detection pro-
tocol indicated it was received without errors. (This is how packet
radio provides error-free communication.)
At times a packet will not be received correctly by the other station
because of collisions with packet signals from other stations, or
channel noise. If your PK-88 does not get an ACK within a specific
time, it sends the same packet again and increments the RETRY count.
If the RETRY count is exceeded, your PK-88 disconnects and displays:
*** Retry count exceeded
-bu DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
The automatic disconnect feature avoids excessive retransmitting of
useless packets. The disconnect prevents a â€˜hopelessâ€™ condition from
tying up the channel if, for example, the other operator turns off his
station without disconnecting, or your path is through a digipeater
that stops operating, or the RF channel becomes unusable.
If you are operating under special conditions such as an emergency
communications channel or a marginal HF channel, you can set RETRY to
O (zero) to disable all automatic disconnects.
Please use this zero value (infinite retries) with discretion.
Monitoring Activity on the Channel
This section describes the monitor functions.
In addition to displaying data from the station to which you are con-
nected, you can monitor all packet activity on the channel or display
packets flowing between other stations. The PK~88 will also store the
call signs of all stations heard on the channel in the HEARD buffer.
4-ll PK88-63

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
h.8.l
Monitoring Other Stations
Use the MONITOR parameter to set the monitoring method; what stations
will or will not be monitored and the type and amount of information
shown by the monitor.
MONITOR takes a numerical value between zero (0) and six (6). Each
higher number adds more detail to the monitoring. As the value of the
MONITOR setting is increased, additional functions are included in the
monitoring sequences.
The meanings of the MONITOR numbers are:
O Monitoring is disabled.
1 Only unnumbered, 'unconnected' frames are displayed. Use 1 for
'unprotocolled,' communication with multiple stations. Other
connected stations using the frequency are not displayed. This
setting will also display beacons.
2 Numbered (I) frames are also displayed. I-frames are numbered in
order of generation and appear in a connected transmission. Use
this to monitor connected conversations in progress.
3 Connect request (C) frames and disconnect (D) frames are also
displayed with the headers.
A This is ghe PK-88's default value Unnumbered acknowledgment
(UA) of connect and disconnect frames are also displayed with
either the characters UA or DH and a header.
5 Receive Ready (RR), Receive Not Ready (RN), Reject (RJ), Frame
Reject (FR) and I-Frames (I) are also displayed.
6 Poll/Final bit and sequence numbers are also displayed.
Before this next step, verify that your loopback test cable is still
connected to the PK-88's J2 RADIO connector.
0 Type: <CTRL-C> D <RETURN> to make sure you are DISGONNECTED.
0 Type: MONITOR 4. The PK-88 responds with: MONITOR was 4.
o Type: CONVERSE, then type: â€˜This is a test packet.â€™
Your monitor now shows:
MYCALL>CQ:This is a test packet.
Because the UNPROTO parameter is defaulted to the address CQ, your
packets are sent to CQ ~ you are not connected to any other station.
Your packet was â€˜heardâ€™ and decoded by the PK-88 and displayed with
the packet header containing the sending station's call sign and the
destination.
b-l2 PKSE-6b

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.8.2
4.8
4.9
Monitoring Digipeaters - The MRPT Command
Set MRPT ON to see any digipeater stations being used. This feature
is useful if you want to connect to a station you are monitoring and
need to know a digipeater route in order to reach it. For example,
you might see the following:
NX1AAA*>NX2BBB>WX3CCC:Hello, Bill!
This packet went from NXIAAA via WXZBBB to WXZCCC. The '*' shows you
which station you actually decoded. If the PK-88 had decoded the
packet from WXZBBB, the display would have shown:
WX1AAA>WX2BBB*>WX3CCC:Hello, Bill!
If several digipeaters are active, or if the message lines are long,
the display may be difficult to read. You can put the header on a
separate line from the text by setting HEADERLN ON:
NXlAAA*>WX2BBB>WX3CCC:
Hello, Bill!
Monitoring Other Stations While Connected
Use the MCON command for selective monitoring of other traffic on the
channel while connected to a distant station. MCON works like MONI-
TOR, but affects your display while in the connected state. As the
value of MCON is increased, additional functions are included in the
uonitoting sequences.
The PK-88's default (MCON 0) tells your system Q9; to show packets
from other stations while ygg age connected to any station. This lets
you converse without interruption and confusion caused by the mixture
on your screen of everyone else's packets and those of the distant
station to which you're connected.
You might use MCON set to l to monitor the Mail List beacons from a
PBBS while holding connected conversations with the distant stations
on the channel. Whenever a beacon is sent, that message is displayed
while you are connected to another station. (See previous sections.)
Selective Monitoring
The MFROM, MTO and MONITOR commands provide certain monitor features
not previously available in some earlier packet controllers. You can
use these commands in combination to display or hide traffic to and
from any stations or combination of stations as required. You might
want to inhibit display of a busy bulletin board or electronic mail
system while you are monitoring other conversations.
4-13 PK88-65

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.9.1
The HFROH Command
HFROM uses arguments to determine how the PK-88 monitors packet chan-
nels and displays information - which stationsâ€™ packets will be dis-
played and which stationsâ€˜ packets will be masked or hidden.
MFROM is set to ALL when you start the PK-88 for the first time.
o Type MFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES list/NO list status of
call signs of stations from whom packets will or will not be
displayed. You can use the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmdzmfrom
MFROM all
cmd:mf
MFROM yes WXIAAA UXZBBB WX3CCC WXADDD
o To stop display of all packets:
type 'MFROM NONEâ€˜ and â€˜MTG NONEâ€™
This has the same effect as setting MONITOR to zero (0).
o To display packets ggly jggg one or more specific stations:
type 'MFROM YESâ€˜ (followed by a list of calls signs).
Only packets from stations whose call signs are listed after YES
will be displayed. MTO should be NONE.
0 To hide or mask packets only from one or more specific stations:
type 'MFROM NOâ€˜ (followed by a list of call signs).
Only packets from stations whose call signs are listed after N0
gill gg; be displayed.
You can add optional SSIDs specified as â€˜Â»n' after the call sign. If
MFROM is set to N0 UXIAAA or YES WXIAAA, any combination of WXlAAA,
WX1AAA~l, WXIAAA-l5 will be matched and processed.
If MFROM is set to YES UXlAAA-1 or N0 WXIAAA-l, then only WXlAAA-1
will match and be processed.
When NFROH and MTO contain different types of arguments, to avoid any
possible conflict, the arguments take the following priority:
ALL, N0-list, YES-list, NONE
Clear the MFROM field by typing '%,' '&,' or 'OFF' as the argument.
A-lb PK88-66

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
lÂ¢.9.2 The HTO Command
MTO functions like MI-â€˜ROM and uses identical arguments to determine how
the PK-88 monitors the packet channels and displays information; the
stations whose packets will be displayed or hidden. MTO is set to
NONE when you start the PK-88 for the first time.
o To display the ALL/NONE/YES list/N0 list status of call signs of
stations Q whom packets will or will not be displayed:
type â€˜MTGâ€™
You can use the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmd:mto
MTO all
cmdzmt
MTO yes WXIAAA WXZBBB WXJCCC WXl4DDD
o To stop display of i packets:
type â€˜MFROM NONEâ€˜ and 'MTO NONEâ€˜
This has the same effect as setting MONITOR to 0 (zero).
0 To display packets gig Q one or more specific stations:
type 'MTO YESâ€™ (followed by a list of calls signs).
Only packets from stations whose call signs are listed after YES
will Qg displayed. MFROH should be NONE.
o To hide or mask packets only Q one or more specific stations:
type â€˜MTO NOâ€˜ (followed by a list of call signs).
Only packets to stations whose call signs are listed after N0
will not b_e displayed.
You can add optional SSIDS specified as '-nâ€˜ after the call sign. If
MTO is set to N0 UXZBBB or YES VX2588, any combination of WXZBBB,
WXZBBB-l, WXZBBB-15 will be matched and processed.
If MTO is set to YES WXZBBB-1 or N0 WXZBBB-1, then only HXZBBB-l will
match and be processed.
When MFROM and MTO contain different types of arguments, to avoid any
possible conflict, the arguments take the following priority:
ALL, NO list, YES list, NONE
Clear MTO with '%,' â€˜&,' or '0FFâ€˜ as the argument.
lo-15 PKSB-67

PK'B8 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
h.9.3
h.9.b
h.9.5
The MOON Command
Use the MCON command for selective monitoring of other traffic on the
channel while connected to a distant station. Use this feature to
'listen' for specific stations while you are connected to someone else
Set MCON to 0 or OFF if you do not wish to monitor packet activity
when you are connected to someone.
MCON works like MONITOR but affects your display while connected. As
the HCON setting is increased, more functions are added in monitoring
sequences. The meanings of the parameter values are identical to
those shown for the MONITOR command.
The HFILTER Command
Use the MFILTER command to â€˜filterâ€™ selected characters from packets
received. For example, you can command the PK-88 system to filter out
form feeds or bell characters that may be sent by the station with
which you are connected, but which may interfere with your display or
otherwise disturb your operations. You can specify up to four char-
acters by giving the ASCII character codes in either hexadecimal or
decimal numbers.
The default value of $80 (hex) filters all received control characters
except <CTRL-M), the carriage return, <CTRL-J>, the line feed, and
<CTRL-1>, the TAB character.
When entering hexadecimal numbers, be sure to prefix the number with
the '$â€˜ sign. Some examples follow:
o To prevent a <CTRL-L> character from clearing your screen, set
MFILTER to 12.
o To eliminate <CTRL-Z> characters, which some computers interpret
as the "clear screenâ€œ character, set MFILTER to 26.
o To prevent <CTRL-G> characters from 'beepingâ€˜ your computer or
terminal, set MFILTER to 7
Enter the ASCII or hexadecimal values of the selected characters sepaâ€”
rating each value with a comma:
cmd:MFlLTER $07, $13
The HHEARD Monitor Buffer
Use the HEARD command to display a list of stations heard since the
last time you applied power to the PK~88, or since the last time the
HHEARD buffer was cleared. Entries in the â€˜heardâ€˜ report are also
time stamped if the date/time has been set with the DAYTIME command.
Clear the MHEARD buffer by typing either a â€˜percent signâ€˜ (5), an am-
persand (&), 'N,' 'NO,â€˜ 'NONE' or â€˜OFFâ€™ after the command word.
0 StatiOnS heard directly are marked with a '*.
o Stations heard through a digipeater are not marked.
A-16 PK88-68

PK-BB OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.9.6
4.9.7
HSTAMP - The Monitor Time-Stamp Command
Monitored packets can be time-stamped if DAYTIME has been set. To
enable this function, set MSTAMP ON. You can also time-stamp connect
and disconnect messages with the command CONSTAMP ON.
o If DAYSTAMP is OFF, CONSTAMP and MSTAHP show only TIME.
o If DAYSTAMP is ON, the DATE is included in CONSTAHP and MSTAHP.
Set DAYSTAMP ON when you want a dated record of packet channel acti-
vity, or when you are unavailable for local packet operation.
DAYTIME - Set the Real-Time Clock
Use the DAYTIME command to activate the PK-88's real-time clock by
setting the date and time. The PK-88 displays current date and time
information.
After the clock is set, you can display the time by entering DAYTIME
without parameters. If you have removed power from the PK-88 since
the last time you entered DAYTIME, you will have to reset the clock.
The PK-88's time is updated continually as long as power is applied.
The clock is got set when the PK-88 is turned on. The DAYTIME command
will display the following error message:
cmd:daytime
?c1ock not set
You must reset the date and time each time you RESET or remove power
from the PK-88. Otherwise CONSTAMP and MSTAMP will not 'stamp' the
time. The format of the display is dd-mm-yy hhzmmiss.
DAYTIME 03-Feb-87 06:57:33
The format for entering the date and time is 'yymmddhhmmss,' where:
yy is the last two digits of the year
mm is the twoâ€”digit month code (01-l2)
dd is date (01-31)
hh is the hour (O0-23)
mm is the minutes after the hour (O0-59)
ss is the seconds after the minute (00-59)
Example: cmdzdaytime 8706281bSOA0
DAYTIME 28-Jun~87 14:50:50
A~17 PK88-69

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
h.lO
h.lO.l
b.l0.2
b.lO.3
Packet Formatting
The PK-88 uses certain special characters to control its operations.
Some of the PK>88's command parameters affect how your packets are
formatted - how your typing appears to other stations. Other commands
permit correction of typing errors before your packet is sent, cancel
lines, and cancel entire packets if necessary. Host of the special
input characters are active in both Command and Converse modes.
NOTE: Most console editing features and commands are disabled or
not available when connected in Transparent mode.
If the default command character is unsuitable for your computer's
terminal program, you can redefine each function using any ASCII char-
acter appropriate to your needs.
See Chapter 5, the â€˜Command Summaryâ€™ chapter for full details on how
to define these formatting and control features and commands.
PACLEN - Long or Short?
PACLEN sets the maximum length of your packet â€” the largest number of
characters that can fit in one packet. If you type more than this
number of characters (default l28) without typing a â€˜send-packet
character (default <CR>), the PK-88 will send a maximum-length packet.
Experimental evidence shows that reducing PACLEN to 6b or even 32 can
improve throughput under difficult conditions such as on HF radio.
NOTE: Some other packet systems may be unable to accept packets
longer than 128 characters.
Backspace and Delete
You can erase typing errors with your <BACKSPACE> key. If your ter-
minal lacks <BACKSPACE>, set DELETE ON to erase characters with the
<DELETE> key; set DELETE OFF to use the <BACKSPACE> key.
You will probably want to use the same key your computer normally uses
to â€˜rub outâ€˜ typing. If you are not sure what your rubout key does.
try both settings of the DELETE command and see which works.
when you rub out typing errors, the PK-88 tries to correct the screen
display. This works with most computers and display-type terminals.
It will not work for hardcopy terminals. If your display does not
look right after you rub out a character, try setting BKONDEL OFF.
The PK-88 will not correct the display but will show the rubout with
a '\' character (<BACKSLASH>). Restore the display correction by set-
ting BKONDEL ON.
Cancel Line
If you make several mistakes, or change your mind, you can cancel the
whole line by typing <cTRL-X> rather than rubbing out the characters
one at a time. Your monitor displays a <BACKSLASH> and a <CR>;
A-18 PK88-70

PK~B8 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
b.lO.h
h.l0.5
b.l0.6
Ã©.lO.7
cmd:Hi, John, how are you?<CTRL-X>\
[You started typing text while in Command Mode.]
cmd2CONVERSE
Hi, John, how are you?
Redisplay
If you have erased and retyped lots of characters, you may want to see
â€˜freshâ€™ input, especially if BKONDEL is OFF. The PK-88 shows the line
you are entering when you type <CTRL-R>:
cmd : counter KB7\\\WA7<C'l'Rl.~R>\
[You mistyped the call sign.]
cmd:CONNECT WA7GXD
Here you mistyped the first letters of the call and rubbed them out.
The PK-88 displayed '\' for each letter erased. You then retyped the
call and redlsplayed the characters on the new line.
XON/XOFF, START/STOP â€” Display Flow Control
Type <CTRL-S> to stop the display if your monitor scrolls the data
faster than you can read it.
Type <CTRL-Q> to resume output from the PK-88 to your computer.
The PASS Character
You may want to include a special input character in a packet. You
can include any character in a packet (including special characters)
by prefixing that character with the pass character, <CTRL-V>. For
example, to send several lines in the same packet, you must include
<CR> at the end of each line:
I was not at the meeting.<CTRL-V><CR>
What happened?
Without the PASS character, this message would go as two packets. By
prefixing the first <CR> with <CTRL~V>, you send it all at once.
More Carriage Returns and Line Feeds
If the send-packet character is set to <CR>, you will probably want
the <CR> to be included in the packet for display at the other end.
If you set the send-packet character to a non-printing character, you
will probably want that character to be treated only as a command.
The ACRPACK command determines whether the send-packet character is
echoed and included in the packet.
If the other station reports that lines are overprinted on his display
and he cannot change it at his end, set ALFPACK to ON.
These formatting features and commands are described in full detail in
Chapter 5, the â€˜Command Summaryâ€˜ chapter.
4-19 PK88-71

PK*88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
h.ll
b.ll.l
b.1l.2
h.ll.3
Multiple Connections
Multiple connections are a powerful addition to the PK-88. This
feature can be very useful for net operation, multi-user electronic
mail, path checking and conversations with multiple stations.
In a multiple connection, you can establish â€˜point-to-pointâ€˜ links
with several different stations. Think of multiple connections like a
telephone with several different lines selected by line buttons. You
will use a similar technique in handling packet multiple connections.
Default Multiple-Connect Conditions
At start-up time and until you change it, the PK-88 defaults to the
following multiple-connect conditions:
CHCALL OFF CHDOUBLE OFF
CHSWITCH $00 USERS l
These defaults set the PKâ€”B8 to operate exactly as would a TNC without
the multipleâ€”connect feature.
The USERS Command ~ Multiple-Connect Active
The USERS command affects only the manner in which incoming connect
requests are handled, and has no effect on the number of connections
you initiate with the PK-88.
A numerical value 'n' from O to 10 specifies the number of
simultaneous connections that the PK-88 will receive. For example:
USERS O allows incoming connections on
USERS 1 allows incoming connections on
USERS 2 allows incoming connections on
USERS 3 allows incoming connections on
and so on, through USERS l0.
any free logical channel
logical channel 0 only
logical channels 0 and l
logical channels 0, 1 and 2
CHSWITCH Character Selection
CHSWITCH selects the character used to change channels in multiple-
connect operation. The value 'n' 0 to $FF (0 to 255 decimal)
specifies the desired character.
o CHSWITCH characters must not be channel numbers (O to 9).
The PK-88's default for CHSUITCH is $00, which disables the function.
Set the CHSWITCH character to a hexadecimal value from $00 to SFF,
for any character that you will not normally use. You can switch
â€˜logical channelsâ€˜ in a multiple-connect situation by typing the
GHSWITCH character even when in the Converse Mode.
The CHSWITCH character can be PASSed in CONVERS mode, and is always
ignored TRANSPARENT mode; it just flows through as data. The
outgoing channel in fart cannot be changed while in TRANSPARENT mode.
A-20 PKEB-72

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.l1.b
4.11.5
b.ll.6
The CHCALL Command - Display Multiple-Connect Call Signs
CHCALL displays the call sign of the â€˜connected-toâ€˜ station after the
channel identifier. Set CHCALL ON if you plan to use multiple
connections.
The CHDOUBLE Command - Display Doubled Characters
When CHDOUBLE is set ON, your monitor displays received CHSWITCH
characters as doubled characters.
Setting CHDOUBLE ON helps you tell the difference between CHSWITCH
characters you type, and those received from other stations.
General Hints on Multiple-Connect Operation
Here are some general suggestions on multi<connect operation.
1. Choose the equals sign (â€”) as your switch character.
Type 'CHSWITCH $30â€™ to enter the â€” sign.
2. To see the call signs of the stations with whom you are
connected, type â€˜CHCALL ON.â€™
3. To accept the maximum number of multi-connects, type â€˜USERS 10.â€˜
6. Assume you want to connect to both WXIAAA and WXZBBB type:
cmd:-0 CONNECT UXlAAA
and
Cmd:=l CONNECT WXZBBB
If you are not successful with either call, the PK-88 displays:
cmd:-0: *** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTED: WXIAAA
=1: *** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTED: HX2BBB
S. After you are connected, you can tell who's talking to you by:
=O:WXlAAA: Hi Raplh.
-1:WX2BBB: Long time no see!
6. To talk with UXIAAA in Converse mode, type:
=0 Hello Charlie!
To talk with WXZBBB, do the same thing for his channel:
-1 Hello Frank how are you?
7. To disconnect from WXIAAA, type:
<CTRL-C>-ODISCONNECT
b*2l PKBB-73

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
A.l2
QI12Al
h.12.Z
b.l2.2.l
4.12.2
Mailbrop Operation
The PK-88's HailDrop is a small, efficient personal mailbox that uses
a subset of the well-known WORLI/WA7MBL packet BBS commands. When
your Hailbrop feature is active, distant stations can connect to your
PK-88, leave messages for you or read messages from you.
There are several important differences from standard "Mailbox" or
BBS operation:
o All messages are either from you Q; gg you; to or from the call-
sign stored as HYCALL.
o Third~party messages are NOT accepted.
0 ALL messages are considered private.
o SSIDs are always ignored on the MallDr0p.
RAM Space for Message Storage
Approximately 8000 bytes of RAM are available to your MailDrop. RAM
space is dynamically allocated so that it is possible to store a max-
imum of 15 messages.
The entire B000 byte RAM can be used for a single message or for up
to a maximum of 15 available message numbers (1-15). If all 8K of
the RAM is used, or if the maximum 15 messages have been filed, the
Mailbrop displays the error message "*** No free memory". If there
is enough room, the PK-88 displays the Mailbrop command prompt.
System Commands
Mailbrop operation is completely under your "SysOp" control from your
local terminal or computer keyboard. Only you can start and stop
Mailbrop service. The commands shown below provide Mailbrop control.
Start and Stop MailDrop Operation
Set MAILDROP to ON to start Hailbrop operation (the default is OFF)
This command activates or deactivates your Mailbrop. The minimum
command string is MAI. Set MAILDROP OFF to deactivate your Mailbrop.
Local Logan and Verification
Type MDCHECK (or MDC) to verify that you have local control.
MDCHECK is an immediate command with which you can log on to your own
MailDrop just as a calling station would. Once logged on to your
Mailbrop from your local keyboard, you are shown the Mailbrop prompt
as though ygg were the calling station:
[ABA PK-88] 8151 (B,K,L,R,S) >
where 8151 is the number of bytes of RAM available to the MailDrop.
b-22 PK88-74

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.12.2
A.l2.3
You can now LIST. READ, SEND or KILL messages. While you're â€˜logged
onâ€˜ to your own Mailbrop with the HDCHECK command, a connect request
from a calling station will cause the PK-88 to send the 'BUSY' (DM)
frame and DISCONNECT to the distant station.
If MAILDROP is OFF, the HDCHECK command will produce a '?What?' error
message. A calling station's connect request will be treated as an
ordinary packet connection. You cannot kill messages or clear the
Mailbrop. You must use the MDCHECK command to â€˜log onâ€˜ to your Mail-
Drop to use the Mailbrop KILL command (see below).
A blinking STA LED shows that a message has been left for the PK-88
owner. Use of the MDCHECK command extinguishes the STA LED.
The following conditions are required to use the local logon feature:
o MAILDROP must be set ON.
o You cannot log on to your Mailbrop while a calling station is
connected or a connect is in progress.
Type 'B' (BYE) to â€˜log offâ€™ or quit control of your Mailbrop. Your
PK-88 is returned to MailDrop operation and made available to calling
stations. A connect request from a calling station will now cause
the PK-B8 to connect and send the Mailbrop prompt to the distant
station.
You still have full control of your PK-88 while the MAILDROP is ON.
You can initiate outbound connect requests to other packet stations
and carry on normal connected-mode contacts. You can make multiple
connections on any of the logical channels. However, you should not
enter Converse or Transparent mode on the same logical channel as a
calling station using the Mailbrop.
Monitor Mailbrop Operation
Set MDMON to ON (default) to monitor your Mailbrop. The minimum
command string is MDM. Set MDMON OFF to cancel MailDrop monitoring.
The HDMON command permits you to monitor a calling station's activity
on your MailDrop showing you both sides of the Mailbrop QSO. Packet
headers are not shown while a caller is connected to your HailDr0p.
when a caller is not connected to your MailDrop, channel activity is
monitored in normal fashion according to the setting of MONITOR.
Caller Prompt
MDPROMPT (text) is the message prompt sent to a calling station by
your Mailbrop. This prompt has no connection with BTEXT and is sent
only when a logged~on caller wishes to send a message.
You can install any â€˜personalizedâ€™ text with a maximum length of 80
bytes. The minimum command string is MDP. The default prompt is:
"Enter message, '2 (CTRL-Z) to end"
b-23 PKQB-75

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
b.l2.A
4.12.4
4.l2.h
h.12.b
Caller and SysOp Mailbrop Commands
While your MailDrop is active, or if you have logged on to your Mail-
Drop from your local keyboard with the MDCHECK command, the only com-
mands available to you and the calling station are:
B, K, L, R and S.
Any other command sent by the calling station is answered with the
error message "*** What?". If you as SysOp enter an incorrect com-
mand, you'll see the error message "?What?" (no asterisks).
While a distant station is using the Mai1Drop, you can continue to
issue commands to the PK-88 without interfering with the HailDrop.
The â€˜standardâ€™ BBS commands available to both you and the calling
station are:
V177("7â‚¬U1
BYE Log off the Hai1Drop
KILL Kill or delete messages
LIST List the message directory
READ Read a specific message
SEND Send a message
Only the first letter of the command is significant; for example, S,
SP, ST and SB are all treated equally as the SEND command.
B (BYE)
The â€˜Bâ€™ command logs the calling station (and you) off the Mailbrop.
A calling station will be disconnected; you will see the standard
PK-88 â€œcmd:" prompt. The calling station may also simply disconnect.
K n (KILL n)
The â€˜K nâ€˜ command deletes message number "n" from the Mailbrop. As
SysOp, you can kill ï¬‚y message. A calling station can kill only
messages addressed to or from that caller. Messages are killed by
number, not callsign.
L (LIST)
The â€˜Lâ€™ command shows a list of all messages active on the Mailbrop.
The list is preceded by the following column header:
Msg# Size To From Date Time
All active messages are listed under this line with the highest mes-
sage number first.
DAYTIME must be set for the Date and Time to appear. Your MailDrop
does Hg; use message titles.
The Hai1Drop LIST command displays ALL message numbers, regardless of
sender or addressee.
A-21Â¢ PK88-76

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.12.4.4
4.12.4.5
4.12.5
R n (READ n)
The â€˜R nâ€˜ command displays the header and text of message number "n".
As Sys0p on the terminal side, you can read all messages. Messages
are read by number, not callsign.
If the calling station or you as Sys0p enter the â€˜Râ€™ command without
a message number, both of you see the error message â€œ*** Not enough".
A caller may READ only messages addressed to that caller's callsign,
or to ALL or QST.
S callsign (SEND callsign)
The â€˜S callsign' command notifies the MailDrop that either you as
Sys0p or the calling station will now send text into a message buf-
fer. A message is stored in the Mailbrop under the lowest available
message number.
If all 8K of the RAM is used, or if the maximum l5 messages have been
filed, the MailDrop displays the error message "*** No free memoryâ€œ.
If there is enough room, the Mailbrop displays the Mailbrop command
prompt:
"Enter message, â€˜Z (CTRL-Z) to end"
When logged on from your local keyboard, if you use the 'S' command
without a callsign, you'll see the error message "*** Need callsign".
However, a calling station may use the S command without a callsign;
it is understood that the message is directed to the PK-88's Sys0pâ€˜
If a callsign is used, it must be either SYSOP or the Same as the
HYCALL of the PK-88.
The CTRL-Z can be the last character on a line, followed by a Return,
or CTRL-Z can be typed on a separate line. In any case, the CTRLâ€”Z
is the last character stored in a message buffer. Any characters
typed after the CTRL-Z are ignored. when the message is read, the
Mailbrop translates the CTRL-Z as a carriage return.
As soon as a calling station uses the S command, the STA light starts
blinking to show that a message has been left for you. MDCHECK stops
the blinking.
Sample Session - The Callerâ€˜s Point of View
Let's see what the Mailbrop looks like to a calling station. Let's
assume that your call is "HXlAAA", and that you wish to connect and
log on to "WX2BBB'sâ€œ MailDt0p system. During your session on his
HailDrop, you wish to list the messages to see if there is a message
for you, read it if it exists, kill it after you're done reading it,
send a return message to UXZBBB and finally log off or disconnect
from his MailDrop.
4-25 PK88-77

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
4.12.5.1
4.12.5.2
6.12.5.3
4.12.5.4
Connect and Logon
From the cmd: prompt, type the usual connect request:
cmdzc wx2bbb (Your connect request]
[AHA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The HailDrop's prompt)
*** CONNECTED to WXIAAA (Your PK-88's status line)
LIST Messages
You're logged on and have gotten the MailDrop's prompt:
[AEA PK~88] 6270 (B.K.L,R,S) > (The Mai1Qrop's prompt)
Now, type
L
Msgx Size
6 18b
S 287
178
324
679
56
w M w b
'L' to LIST all the messages in the Mai1Drop.
(Type the LIST command)
To From Date Time (The Mailbrop responds)
HXIAAA WXZBBB
AD7I WXZBBB
G3PLX WXZBBB
UZHPM WXZBBB
WZJUP UXZBBB
GSECI WXZBBB
[ABA PKÂ»88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mailbrop is ready for next)
READ Messages
v
You've seen the list of messages and wish to READ yours. You ve seen
the MailDropâ€˜s prompt:
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mai1Dropâ€˜s prompt)
Now, type
R 6
Msg# Size
6 lhb
â€˜R #' to READ Qgg specific message in the Mailbrop.
(Type the READ 6 command)
To From Date Time (The Mailbrop responds)
WXIAAA WXZBBB (The message header)
Hello Joe. Did you get the notice (The message)
about next month's meeting of the
Radio Society at the Firehouse?
Will you be going? - I need a ride.
73.
(AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K.L.R,S) > (The Hailbrop is ready again)
KILL Messages
You've read the message addressed to you and wish to KILL it. Again
you see the Mai1Dropâ€˜s prompt:
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The MailDrop's prompt)
A-26 PK88~78

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
A.l2.5.5
b.l2.5.6
h.l2.5.7
Now, type â€˜K wâ€˜ to KILL ggg specific message in the Mailbrop.
K 6 (Type the â€˜KILL 6â€˜ command)
*** Done. (The MailDrop's confirmation)
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The MaXlDrop's prompt again)
SEND Messages
You've killed the message and wish to SEND a reply to the MailDrop's
operator, WXZBBB. Again you see the HailDrop's prompt. Remember -
the number after the right bracket I shows you how much memory space
is available in the Mailbrop. Always verify that the MailDrop has
enough memory remaining for the length of message you intend to send.
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Hai1Drop's prompt)
Now, type â€˜S callsignâ€˜ to SEND a message to the Mai1Drop's operator.
If you omit the callsign, the MailDrop will automatically address the
message to the MYCALL callsign stored in the Mailbrop.
S WXZBBB
Enter message, â€œZ (CTRL-Z) to end
(Type the â€˜SEND cal1sign' command)
(The MailDrop answers you)
YEAH, 1 cor THE MAILING mu wxu.
BE cur: TO PICK YOU ul>. wanâ€˜ TIME
no YOU wmrr ME THERE? IS MARY
come? CUL. wxzass *2
(Type your message to WXZBBB)
(End the message with CTRL-Z)
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The MailDrop is ready again)
Other People's Messages
You've done what you came to do. Now you're curious about the other
messages on the Mailbrop. You try to READ one of them.
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The HailDrop's prompt)
Now, type â€˜R 8â€˜ to READ someone else's messages in the Mailbrop.
R 5 (Type the â€˜READ 5' comand)
*** Not your message. (The Mai1Drop won't let you!)
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mai1Drop is ready again)
Multiple Message Commands
You see that the Mailbrop has more than one message for you, so you
try to read them all at once.
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Hai1Dropâ€˜s prompt)
Now, type â€˜R 8 #â€˜ to READ more than ggg message in the Mailbrop.
R 3 A (You try to READ 2 messages)
*** Too many (The Mailbrop won't let you!)
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Hailbrop is ready again)
A-27 PK88-79

PK-88 OP
4.12.5.8
b.l2.5.9
b.l2.5.l
4.12.6
ERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
Incorrect Commands
Your fingers slip, or you forget to type the number of the message
you're trying to read.
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The MailDrop's prompt)
Now, type 'R' without any message number.
R (You type invalid command)
*** Not enough (The Mailbrop corrects you!)
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mailbrop is ready again)
Sorry, Wrong Number!
You know that your friend WXJCCC also connects to this MailDrop so
you try to send him a message. (He's not the Hai1Drop's operator.)
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mai1Drop's prompt]
Now, type â€˜S callsign' to SEND a message to anyone other than the
Mai1Drop's operator.
S UX3CCC (Send message to other call)
*** No 3rd party traffic. (The HailDrop won't let you!)
[AEA PK~88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) > (The Mailbrop is ready again)
0 Log Off and Disconnect
You're finished with this session. Time to log off the Mailbrop.
[ABA PK-88] 6270 (B.K,L,R,S) > (The MailDrop's prompt]
Now, type â€˜Bâ€™ (for Bye-Bye) to LOG OFF the Mailbrop.
B (Type the Bye-Bye command!
The Mailbrop issues an immediate disconnect command to your PK-88
and the connection is over.
*** DISCONNECTED (Your PK>88's status line)
Sample Session - The MailDrop SysOp's Point of View
Here is a transcription of the entire session described step-by-step
in the previous section, exactly as it would appear to the Mai1Drop's
operator (SysOp). We're assuming that the MDMON command is still set
to ON, the default state.
As long as MDMON is ON, you have the ability to directly supervise the
activities of any station logged on to your Mai1Drop and - if needed -
take any corrective actions.
A-28 PK88-80

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
HX1AAA>WX2BBB <C,P>
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) >
*** CONNECTED to WXIAAA
L
Msg# Size To From Date Time
6 18A WXIAAA "X2833
5 287 AD7I WXZBBB
178 GSPLX UXZBBB
324 WZHPM WXZBBB
679 WZJUP WXZBBB
1 56 G5ECI WXZBBB
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) >
R 6
some
Msg# Size To From Date Time
6 lhh WXlAAA WXZBBB
Hello Joe. Did you get the notice
about next month's meeting of the
Radio Society at the Firehouse?
Will ynu be going? ~ I need a ride.
73.
[AEA PK-88] 6270 (B,K,L,R,S) >
K 6
*** Done.
[BEA PK-83] 5468 (B,K,L,R,S) >
S WXZBBB
Enter message, â€˜Z (CTKL-Z) to end
YEAH, I cow THE MAILING AND WILL
BE GLAD T0 PICK YOU UP. WHAT TIME
no YOU WANT ME THERE? IS MARY
come? cul.. wxzmm *2
[AEA PK-88] sass (B,K,L,R,S) >
R 5
*** Nut your message.
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) >
R 3 4
*** Too many
[AEA PK-88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) >
R
*** Not enough
[AEA PKÂ»88] 6336 (B,K,L,R,S) >
S WX3CCC
*** No 3rd party traffic.
[AEA PKâ€”88] 6336 (B.K,L,R,S) >
B
*** DISCONNECTED
WXlAAA>CQ <ul>:
A-29 PK88-81

PK- 88 OPERATING MANUAL PACKET OPERATION
A - 30 PK88 â€˜ 8 2

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
CHAPTER 5
COMAND SUMMARY
Introduction
This chapter explains and illustrates the PK-88's commands. You will
use some commands to control the PK-88 under specific conditions, and
others to specify the values of parameters used in general operation.
The PK-88 is a â€˜command-drivenâ€˜ system; it does not provide â€˜menusâ€™.
You control the functions of the PK-88 by typing single- or multiple-
character commands at your computer's keyboard,
We will use UPPER CASE in this chapter to show the commands, and lower
case to explain the text.
Entering Commands
Commands are entered after the Command Mode prompt:
cmd:
You will use English-like words or abbreviations to change the value
of parameters and issue instructions to the PK-88.
0 Commands are either keywords or mnemonics (special abbreviations)
made up of strings of characters that you type.
You may never need to change the values of some parameters. However,
these commands give you maximum flexibility to adapt the PK-88 to your
local environment and operating conditions.
o Use either upper case (capital letters) or lower case (small let-
ters) when typing commands.
o End the command with a carriage return <CR>. Carriage returns
are not shown in the examples below.
o Correct your typing mistakes or cancel the line completely before
typing the final <CR> of your command.
o See Chapter 3 for a discussion of line editing.
Command Responses
Whenever the PK-88 accepts a command that changes a value, the PK-88
responds with the previously stored value.
For example, assume that 'XFLDW' is â€˜ONâ€™ and you type 'XFLOW OFFâ€™;
you will see the display:
XFLOW was ON
This message confirms that the value has been changed successfully.
S-1 PK88-83

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.1.3
5.2
Error Messages
If the PK-88 cannot understand what you have typed, you will see an
error message in plain language reporting the nature of the error.
o If you type a command the PK-88 cannot understand - you will see:
?What?
o If you type a correct command word with a wrong argument:
7bad
o If you type a numerical value outside a parameter's range:
Yrange
o If you set the BEACON interval too short for busy channels:
WARNING: BEACON too often
Here are a few more examples:
CMGIASDFASDF
7WhaC?
~ This is not a command.
cmd:BEACON E
?bad
- A parameter was omitted.
cmd:PACLEN 265
?range
- Unacceptable numerical value.
cmd:DAY - You did not set the PK-88's clock
?c1ock not set
Command List
Commands are listed alphabetically in the following detailed command
descriptions.
Each command entry contains several sections:
o Command name
o Command abbreviation or mnemonic
o Default value
o Parameters
5-2 PK88-86

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
Command Names
The command name at the beginning of the description is the full word
you can type to execute that command. You will also see the minimum
abbreviation or mnemonic that you can use instead of the full word.
You can always type the entire command word, or any abbreviation
longer than the minimum abbreviation.
For example, consider the HYCALL command:
o Enter the command MYCALL by simply typing â€˜HY.â€™ (NOTE: D0 NOT
type the â€˜quotation marksâ€˜ - we use these only for clarity.)
The abbreviation â€˜Mâ€™ is not sufficient and will be interpreted as the
MONITOR command. However, â€˜HY,â€˜ 'HYC,' 'HYCA,' 'MYCAL' or 'HYCALL'
are all acceptable.
If a command requires parameters, the type of parameter is indicated
after the command name as well as the default value. For example:
o 'n' means the command takes a numerical parameter value.
Default Values
Most commands have initial (default) values that the PK-88 assumes for
average operating conditions, or values that are used most often.
These defaults are stored in EPROM and loaded when power is first
applied to the PK-88, or when you type the RESET command.
You are encouraged to experiment with different values to determine
changes that may be more efficient for your operating environment.
Parameters, Arguments and Values:
Some commands need additional information before they can be executed.
This type of command has 'parametersâ€˜ or requires 'arguments'.
For example, a command such as FULLDUP has a Boolean parameter. When
you type 'FULLDUP ONâ€™, FULLDUP is the command, ON is its argument -
the value you want the PK-88 to use to execute the command FULLDUP.
o The value that fills this parameter is either ON or OFF.
o Immediate commands such as 'ID' have no parameters. Typing only
'ID' causes the PKÂ»88 to execute the command (if HID is set ON).
Some commands such as 'CONNECT' have optional parameters.
o If you type 'CONNECT' without an argument, the PK-88 displays the
current status of the link.
However, if you type â€˜CONNECT WXIAAA,â€˜ the PK-88 issues the connect
request and tries to establish the link to WXIAAA.
Some commands such as HFILTER can use several arguments at the same
time. HFILTER accepts from one to four numerical arguments.
5~3 PK88-85

PK-BB OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.1.3
Parameters
Three different types of parameters are used: Boolean, numeric and
text or string.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters use one value out of a choice of only two possible
values, such as ON or OFF, YES or N0, or EVERY or AFTER. Boolean par-
ameters can also be toggled with an argument of 'TOGGLE' or 'T.'
0 When a parameter is Boolean, its two possible choices are shown
separated by a vertical bar.
Numeric Parameters
A parameter designated as 'Q' is a numeric value.
o Numeric values can be entered by typing familiar decimal numbers,
or optionally in hexadecimal numbers.
In using hexadecimal notation, you must prefix the number you type
with a '$' character.
The PK-88 displays numeric parameters which set special characters in
hexadecimal format. Here's a brief explanation of â€˜hexâ€™ numbers:
0 The 'digitsâ€˜ of a hex number represent powers of 16 in the same
manner as the powers of 10 represented by a decimal number.
0 The numbers 10 through 15 are indicated by hexadecimal digits A
through F. For example:
$13 - <1 X 16) + (11 X 1) - 27 (decimal)
$120 = (1 X 1a x le) + (2 X 16) + (0 X 1) - zsa (decimal)
1
For numeric parameters in the range 0 to 255, arguments ONâ€˜ or â€˜Yâ€™
set the value of the parameter to their ROM default values. Arguments
'0FF' or 'N' set the value to 0 (zero).
Baud-rate parameters can use arguments UP (U) or DOWN (D) to select
the next higher or lower radio (HDLC) link or terminal baud rate.
Text or String Parameters
A text parameter such as the argument or â€˜messageâ€™ for CTEXT (your
'connect' message), can be typed in upper or lower case.
0 A text parameter can include numbers, spaces, and punctuation.
o The text is accepted exactly as you type it
Some commands require call signs as parameters. The parameters may be
any string of numbers or letters, up to six characters; character
strings are used to identify stations sending and receiving packets.
5-A PK88~86

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
Sq342
A call sign can also include a numeric extension or substation
identifier (SSID). These extensions distinguish between two or more
stations with the same call (such as a base station and a digipeater).
The call sign and any required extensions or SSlDs are entered and
displayed as â€˜call-n,â€˜ e.g. , â€˜KXIAAA-12', or 'WX1AAA-1' . If an SSID
or extension is not entered, the system assumes an SSID of '0' (zero).
The zero SSID is not normally displayed by the PK~88.
Some commands have parameters which are really lists of call signs:
0 CFROM, MFROM, MTO and DFROH commands allow you to specify from
one to eight call signs for selective or restrictive operations.
o You must separate multiple call signs with blank spaces, commas,
or tabs.
The following examples will help you understand these explanations.
o BEACON EVERY|AFTER 'n'
The BEACON command requires an argument;
- You must specify either EVERY or AFTER (abbreviated E or A),
and an argument 'n' which is chosen from a range of values.
An appropriate entry would be BEACON EVERY 180. In this case, a
beacon is sent every (180 times 10) seconds, every 30 minutes.
If BEACON EVERY 0. the beacon is Q9; transmitted.
o CONNECT calll [VIA call2[,call3...,call9I]
The CONNECT command requires a call sign argument calll.'
- You may optionally include the keyword VIA, followed by a
list of one to eight call signs, 'call2' through 'call9'.
- Multiple call signs in the list must be separated by commas
(as shown) or by blank spaces.
An acceptable entry would be: 'C WXIAAA V WX2BBB,WX3CCC'
Using Commands Without Arguments
If you type the command name without any arguments, the current value
of the command's arguments is displayed. For example:
cmd:MRPT - Command typed without arguments
MRPT ON - displays the present value.
cmd:MRPT Y - Sets the value to YES (ON)
WRPT was OFF < Displays the previous value
NOTÂ§: The DISPLAY command shows you the values of all parameters
or groups of related parameters.
5-5 Pl(88Â»87

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMARY
5.h
5.4.1
Controller Messages
This section describes the PK-88's messages and circumstances in which
the messages can appear. The messages are shown in boldface type.
General
Sign-On Message
AEA PK~8B Packet Controller
AX.25 Level 2 Version 2.0
Copyright (C) 1966, 1987, 1988 by
Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.
Release xx.xxx.xx +
Checksum Syy
cmd:
This sign>0n message appears when you apply power to the PK-88, or
when you type 'RESTART'. The release date is updated whenever the
firmware is changed. The checksum is a number used to verify the
EPROM firmware.
PK88 is using default values
This message appears along with the sign-on message above if the bbRAM
checksum verification fails. This causes the PK-B8 to load the
default parameters from EPROM. This will happen the first time you
apply power to the PK-88 or if the batteries fail. This message also
appears after the RESET command is given.
cmd:
This is the Command Mode prompt. When this prompt appears, the PK-88
is waiting for you to issue a command. Anything you type after this
prompt, up to and including the first <CR> is interpreted as a com-
mand. If a monitored packet has been displayed, the prompt may not
be visible, even though you are in Command Mode. You can type the
redisplay-line character (set by REDISPLA) to retype the ptompt.
Ha s
HO"
Whenever you change one of the PK-88's parameters, if BBSMSGS is set
to OFF, both the previous value and the new value will be displayed.
This confirms that the PK-88 interpreted your command properly, and
reminds you of what you have done.
too many packets outstanding
This message appears in special circumstances in response to a CONVERS
or TRANS command. For example, if you have already typed packet data
and filled the outgoing buffer in the Converse Mode or Transparent
Mode and then tried to return to the Command Mode, this message would
appear. You will be allowed to enter one of these modes when some of
the packets have been successfully transmitted.
5-6 PK88-88

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.h.2
Command Mode Error Messages
An error message is displayed if you make a mistake typing a command
to the PK-88.
Tbad
You typed a command correctly, but the remainder of the command line
couldn't be interpreted.
1cal1sign
You typed a call sign that does not meet the PKâ€”88's requirements for
call signs. A call sign may be any string of numbers and letters.
Punctuation and spaces are not allowed. The SSID or extension, if
given, is a number from 0 to 15, separated from the call by a hyphen.
Tclock not set
You typed the command DAYTIME, but you have not yet set the clock.
DAYTIME sets the clock if it is typed with the daytime parameters, and
displays the date and time if is typed without parameters.
7What?
Your first entry is not a command or a command abbreviation. The
PK-88 did not understand the instructions.
Tnot enough
You did not type enough arguments for a command that expects several
parameters. For example, â€˜CONNECT WXIAAA VIA.â€˜
Tnot while connected
You attempted to change MYCALL or AX25L2V2 while in a connected or
connecting state.
7range
You typed too large or too small a numeric argument.
?too long
You typed too~long a command line; the line is ignored. For example,
you will see this message if you try to type too long a CTEXT message.
The previous text entry is not changed when you see this error message
?too many
You typed too many arguments for a command that expects several para-
meters. For example, MFILTER can have up to four arguments.
cmd:MFILTER S1B,$0C,$1A,$03.$O7
?too many
5-7 PK88-89

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
5.4.3
YVIA
You typed more than one call sign for the CONNECT or UNPROTO commands
without the VIA keyword.
?not while disconnected
You tried to set CONPERM while disconnected.
Tchannel must be 0-9
You typed an invalid character after the CHSWITCH character.
Talready connected
You tried to CONNECT to a station to which you are already connected.
?diEferent connectees
You tried to CONNECT to more than one station on the same logical
channel.
Link Status Messages
Link status messages show you the status of AX.2S connections in which
the PK-88 may be involved.
You can ask for link status at any time from the Command Mode by typ-
ing the CONNECT command without parameters.
If you attempt a connection when the PK-88 is not in the disconnected
state, you see the link status but the PK-88 takes no other action.
The following messages appear in response to the CONNECT command.
Link state is: CONNECTED to calll
[VIA cal12[,call3...,cal19]]
Your station is connected to a distant station - you'll see the digi-
peater path in use, if any. The call sign sequence is the same se-
quence you would type to initiate the connection.
Link state is: CONNECTED to calll; v2; 2 unACKed
[VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]
You are connected to a station using Version 2; two frames remain un-
acknowledged.
Link state is: DISCONNECTED
No link or connection exists right now. You may type the CONNECT com-
mand to initiate a connection.
5.3 mas-90

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
Link state is: CONNECT in progress:
calll [VIA call2[,cal13...,cal19]]
You have already typed a connect request but have not received the
acknowledgment from the other station. Type the DISCONNE command to
cancel the connect process.
Link state is: DISCONNECT in progress
calll [VIA call2[,cal13...,call9]]
You have typed a disconnect request but have not received the acknow>
ledgment from the other station. Type a second DISCONNE command to
place the PK-B8 immediately in the disconnected state.
Link state is: FRMR in progress
calll [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]
The PK-88 is connected to a distant station but a protocol error has
occurred. This should never happen when AEA AX.2S systems are con-
nected. An improper implementation of the AX.25 protocol could cause
this condition. Your PK~88 will try to resynchronize frame numbers
with the packet controller on the other end although a disconnect may
result. Connections are not valid in this state; a disconnect will
start the disconnect process.
The PK-88 will tell you whenever the link status changes. Link status
may change in response to:
OOOOO
commands you have typed (CONNECT or DISCONNE)
connect or disconnect requests from a distant station
a disconnect because of the retry count being exceeded
automatic time-out disconnect (CHECK)
protocol errors
*** CONNECTED to: calll [via call2[,cal13...,cal19]]
This message appears when the PK-88 switches from the 'disconnected'
or â€˜connect in progressâ€˜ state to the connected state. The connection
may be a result of a CONNECT command typed by you, or a connect re-
quest packet received from a distant station.
*** Connect request: calll [via call2[,cal13...,call9]]
Your PK-88 has received but not accepted a connect request from a dis-
tant station. This can happen if you have set CFROM to NONE, or if
you are already connected to another station.
When the PK-B8 displays this message, it also sends a DM packet (busy
signal) to the station that initiated the connect request. If the
PK-88 rejects a connect request because you've set CFROH to NONE or
OFF, you can issue your own connect request to the other station.
5-9 PK88-91

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMARY
*** DISCONNECTEDI (call sign)
The PK-88 has switched to disconnected state from a different link
state. This message may be preceded by a message explaining the rea-
son for the disconnect, as shown below.
*** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
The PKâ€”88 has disconnected because of a retry failure rather than a
disconnect request from one of the stations.
*** (call sign) busy
*** DISCONNECTEDZ (call sign)
Your connect request was rejected by a DM packet (busy signal) from
the other station. The PK-88 will reject a connect request if CFROM
is set to NONE, or if you are already connected to another station.
FRMR sent: xx xx xx
The PK-88 is connected but a protocol error has occurred. Your PK-B8
has transmitted a special FRMN packet and is trying to resynchronize
frame numbers with the distant station's system. The string xxxxxx is
replaced with the hexadecimal codes for three bytes sent in the in-
formation part of the FRHR frame. This message will not appear if the
PK-88 is in Transparent Mode.
FRMR rcvd: xx xx xx
Your PK-88 has received an FRMR (protocol error described above) and
displays the FRMR packet in hexadecimal format. This message will not
appear if the PK-88 is in Transparent Mode.
Clear String Commands
While in Command Mode, the following commands can be cleared by typing
the command word followed by a single percent sign (Q), an ampersand
(&) or 'N,' â€˜NO,â€™ â€˜NONE,â€™ â€˜OFFâ€™ as the commandâ€˜s argument.
BTEXT CFROM CTEXT DFROH MBX MYALIAS
MEARD MFROM MTO
Specific Commands and Summary
The following section contains detailed descriptions of the meanings,
uses and effects of each command and parameter, the default values and
arguments. Examples of command usage are included.
Appendix A contains a concise list of all commands and parameters,
mnemonics, defaults and definitions.
5-10 PK88-92

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
8BITCONV 0N|0FF Hnemonic: 8B Default: OFF
Rarameters:
ON - The high~order bit IS NOT stripped in Converse Mode.
OFF - The high-order bit IS stripped in Converse Mode.
BBITCONV permits packet transmission of eight-bit data in the Converse
Mode.
If 8BITCONV is OFF, the high-order bit (bit seven) of characters re-
ceived from the terminal is removed before the characters are trans-
mitted in a packet.
The standard ASCII character set requires only seven bits - the eighth
or final bit is used as a parity bit or ignored.
o Setting bit seven in text characters transmitted over the air may
cause confusion at the other end.
If you need to transmit eight~bit data but don't want all the features
of Transparent Mode, set BBITCONV ON and AWLEN 8. This may be desir-
able if you're using a special non-ASCII character set.
Because commands require only the standard seven-bit ASCII character
set, bit seven is always removed in Command Mode.
AGRDISP 'n' Mnemonic: ACRD Default: 80
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to 255 specifies the screen or printer width, in number of
columns or characters.
0 (zero) disables the function.
The numerical value sets the proper terminal output format for your
specific needs. The PK-88 sends a <CR><LF> sequence to your computer
or terminal at the end of a line in the Conunand and Converse Modes
when 'n' characters have been printed.
o Set ACRDISP to '0' (zero) if your computer or terminal automatic-
ally formats output lines. This avoids conflict between the two
formats.
5-11 PKBB-93

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
ACRPACK ONIOFF Mnemonic: ACRP Default: ON
Parameters :
ON - The send-packet character, normally <CR>, IS added to all
packets sent in Converse Mode.
OFF - The send-packet character is NOT added to packets.
ACRPACK is synonymous with CR and is used in the same manner as the
older command. Either command word has the same effect.
when ACRPACK is ON, all packets sent in Converse Mode include, as the
last character of the packet, the send-packet character which forces
the packet to be sent.
When ACRPACK is OFF, the send-packet character is interpreted only as
a command to the PK-88, not as data to be included in the packet; the
character is not echoed to the terminal
Set ACRPACK ON and SENDPAC $0D to produce natural conversational mode.
Each line is sent when a <CR> is entered, and arrives at its destina-
tion with a <CR> at the end of the line.
If the distant station reports overprinting of lines on his display,
set ALFPACK ON, or the other station can set ALFDISP ON.
ADDRESS â€˜nâ€™ Mnemonic: ADD Default: none
Parameters:
n - a hexadecimal address used with the MEMORY and I/O commands
to access the PK-88': memory and I/O locations, or to read
values stored at a specified address.
The ADDRESS command permits access to memory and I/O locations as fol-
lows:
ADDRESS $aahb
or SOH $1Â»? A E $ a a b b ETB (in the HOST mode).
where "aa" is the device address, and "lab" is the register address on
the device.
Set the hexadecimal address as shown above and then use the MEMORY
command to read the contents of that address. The ADDRESS counter is
incremented or increased by l each time the MEMORY command is typed.
5- l2 PK8B>9lo

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
AFILTER ON|0FF Mnemonic: AF Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The ASCII characters specified in the MFILTER are filtered
from the outbound data and never sent by your PK-88.
OFF - Characters in MFILTER list are only filtered from monitored
packets.
Some terminals and computers use special characters to clear the
screen or perform other "special" functions. Placing these characters
in the MFILTER list and turning AFILTER ON will keep them from being
sent to the distant station by your PK-88.
Exception: When ECHO is ON, and the terminal or computer sends a fil-
tered character, the PKÂ»88 will echo it back to the terminal or com-
puter.
AFILTER works regardless of mode, or CONNECT/CONVERSE/TRANSPARENT sta-
tus. NOIE: verify that AFILTER is OFF during Binary file transfers.
ALFDISP ONIOFF Mnemonic: ALFD Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - A line feed character <LF> IS sent to the terminal after
each carriage return character <CR>.
OFF - A <LF> is NOT sent to the terminal after each <CR>.
ALFDISP controls the display of carriage return characters received in
packets as well as echoing those that are typed in.
When ALFDISP is ON, the PK-88 adds a line feed <LF> to each carriage
return <CR> received. Each line feed received is ignored. Use the
PK-88's sign-on message to determine how carriage returns are being
displayed.
o Set ALFDISP ON if the PK-88's sign-on message lines are typed
over each other.
0 Set ALFDISP OFF if the PK-88's sign-on message is double spaced.
ALFDISP is set correctly if the PK-88's sign-on message is single
spaced. ALFDISP affects your local display. It does not affect the
data sent in any mode.
5-l3 PK88-95

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
ALFPACK ONIOFF Mnemonic: ALF? Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - A <LF> character IS added to outgoing packets following each
<CR> transmitted in the packet. Line feeds from the
terminal are ignored.
OFF - A <LF> is NOT added to outgoing packets.
ALFPACK is similar to ALFDISP, except that the <LF> characters are
added to outgoing packets, rather than only to text displayed locally.
ALFPACK is included to maintain compatibility with other packet radio
controllers.
o If the person you are talking to reports overprinting of packets
from your station set ALFPACK ON. Character insertion is dis-
abled in Transparent Mode.
AWLEN 'n' Mnemonic: AW Default: 7
Parameters:
'n' - 7 or 8 specifies the number of data bits per word.
The parameter value defines the digital word length used by the serial
input/output (I0) terminal port and your computer or terminal program.
o Set AWLEN to 7 for most packet operations, such as conversation,
working electronic mail and bulletin board systems and transmis-
sion of ASCII files.
If eight-bit words are sent to the PK-88 in the Command or Converse
Modes, the eighth bit is normally removed, leaving a standard ASCII
character, regardless of the setting of AWLEN.
All eight data bits of each character must be retained to send execut-
able files or other special data.
o Set AHLEN to 8 and use the Transparent Mode.
You can also use Converse Mode and set AWLEN 8 and 8BITCONV ON. How-
ever, you must precede the Converse Mode special characters with the
PASS character in the data you send.
5-lh PK88-96

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
AX25I.2V2 ON|OFl-â€˜ Mnemonic: A Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 uses AX.25 level 2 Version 2.0 protocol.
OFF - The PK-88 uses AX.25 Level 2 Version 1.0 protocol.
Some implementations of the earlier version of AX.25 protocol will not
repeat Version 2.0 AX.2S packets properly. This command provides com-
patibility with those older packet controllers.
Set AX25L2V2 to OFF if you suspect that local area systems are using
Version 1.0 protocol.
AXDELAY 'n' Mnemonic: AX!) Default: 0
Parameters:
â€˜nâ€™ 0 to 180 specifies a key-up delay for voice repeater operation
in ten-millisecond intervals.
AXDElAY specifies the period of time the PK-88 will wait (in addition
to the normal delay set by TXDELAY) after keying the transmitter and
before data is sent.
Repeaters with slow electromechanical relays, split sites, auxiliary
links (or other circuits which delay transmission for some time after
the RF carrier is present) require some amount of time to get RF on
the air.
lf you are using a repeater that has not been used for packet opera-
tions before, try various values to find the best value for 'n.'
If other packet stations have been using the repeater, check with them
for the proper setting.
AXDELAY acts in conjunction with AXHANG.
5-15 PK88-97

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
AXHANG 'n' Hnemonic: AX}! Default: 0
Parameters :
'nâ€˜ - 0 to 20 specifies voice repeater hang time in 100-milli-
second intervals.
The numeric value can be used to increase channel efficiency when a
voice repeater has a hang time greater than 100 ms. For a repeater
with a long hang time, it is not necessary to wait for the repeater
key-up delay if the repeater is still transmitting.
When the PK-BB has heard a packet sent within the hang period, it does
not add the repeater key-up delay (AXDELAY) to the key-up time. If you
are using a repeater that hasn't been used for packet operations be-
fore, try various values to find the best value for 'n.â€˜
If other packet stations have been using the repeater, ask them for
the appropriate setting.
BBSHSGS 0N|0FF Hnemonic: BBS Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Makes the PK-B8 status messages look like the TAPR-style
output.
OFF - The PK-88 status messages work as before.
When BBSMSGS is ON, some of the status messages change or are sup-
pressed. This can improve operation of the PK-88 with certain BBS
software. If MRPT is ON, digipeater paths are shown in TAPR format.
If BBSMSGS is ON, the following status messages from the PK-88 are
suppressed:
No "(parm) now (value)"
Connect messages: No "; v2; 1 unACKed"
No "xxx in progress: (dest) via (digis)"
No space after comma in digipeater lists
"VIA" in upper case
If BBSMSGS is ON, the following status messages are deleted or
changed:
No "*** connect request:"
N0 "*** retry count exceeded"
Sends carriage return before all other "***"
No "(parm) was (value)"
N0 â€œ(callsign) busy" message
S-l6 PK88Â»9B

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
BEACON EVERY|AF'1â€˜ER 'n' Mnemonic: B Default: EVERY 0
R_g;amete;Â§:
EVERY - Send the beacon at regular intervals.
AFTER - Send the beacon once after the specified time interval
without packet activity.
'n' - 0 to 250 specifies timing in ten-second intervals.
0 - Zero disables off the beacon function.
The BEACON command sets the conditions under which your packet beacon
will be transmitted.
0 A beacon frame contains the text you have typed into the BTEXT
message in a packet addressed to 'CQ' or other UNPROT0 address.
o A beacon frame may be sent directly, and also sent via the digi-
peat addresses specified by the UNPROTO command.
When the keyword EVERY is specified, a beacon packet is sent every n
times 10 seconds. This mode can be used to transmit packets for test-
ing purposes .
when AFTER is specified, a beacon is sent after n times 10 seconds
have passed without packet activity.
o The beacon is sent only once until further activity is detected.
This mode can be used to send announcements or test messages only when
packet stations are on the air.
o Proper choice of 'n' avoids cluttering a busy channel with lots
of unnecessary transmissions.
Beacon frames from other packet stations can be monitored by setting
MONITOR in the range 1-6.
o If you set the BEACON timing at less than '90,â€˜ a value judged by
most authoritative sources as too small for busy channels, you
will see the message:
WARNING: BEACON too often
This message appears in the Command Mode each time a new command is
typed.
5-17 PK88-99

PK-88 OPERATING HANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
BKONDEL ONIOFF Mnemonic: BK Default: ON
Page Â§gÂ§Â§Z
ON - The sequence <.BACl(SPACD<SPACD<BACKSPACE> is echoed when
a character is deleted from the input line.
OFF - The <BACKSIASH> character <\> is echoed when a character is
deleted.
BKONDEL determines how character deletion is displayed in Command or
Converse Mode.
The <BACKSPACE><$PACE><BACKSPACE> sequence updates the video display
screen.
o Set BKONDEL ON if you are using a video display terminal or com-
puter.
On a printing terminal the <BACKSPACK><SPACE><BACKSPACE> sequence will
result in ovettyped text.
o Set BKONDEL OFF if you have a paper output display, or if your
terminal does not respond to the <BACl(SPACE> character <C'1'RL-H>.
The PK-88 displays a <BACl(SIASH> for each character you delete. You
can see a display of the corrected input by typing the redisp1ayâ€”11ne
character set by the command REDISPLA.
5- 18 PKBB- 100

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
ITEXT text Hnemonic: BT Default: Empty
 1
text Any combination of characters and spaces, up to a maximum
length of 120 characters.
BTEXT is the content of the data portion of a beacon packet. The de-
fault text is an empty string (no message).
0 Beacon packets are discussed in more detail under the BEACON c0m~
mend.
You can send multiple-line messages in your beacon by including <CR>
characters in the text. <CR> is inserted by typing the PASS character
before the <CR>
0 The PASS character is set by the PASS command.
If you enter a text string longer than 120 characters, the command is
ignored and the following error message appears:
'Itoo long
An electronic mail system program may set the beacon text to a message
like this, updating the text after each connection:
HAIL for: WXIAAA WXZBBB WXZCCC WXloDDD
o Use a '$,â€˜ '&,' â€˜N,â€™ 'N0,' 'NONE,' or OFF as the first characters
in the text to clear the BTEXT text without issuing the RESET
command.
o The normal packet header shows the call sign.
o Avoid filling your BTEXT with screen graphics such as asterisks,
parentheses, colons and semicolons, etc. Use BTEXT for signifi-
cant information.
o Avoid using BTEXT to send unimportant information. Put casual
information in your CTEXT message so that it is seen only by the
station that connects to you - the only one who can make use of
the information.
5-19 PK88-101

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CALI BRATE Hnemonic : CAL Immediate Command
CALIBRATE is an immediate command that provides a means to key your
transmitter and send continuous ASI-â€˜K tone modulation.
Use the CALIBRATE command to measure transmitter modulation and other
performance characteristics.
Because the Am79l0 chip does not require adjustment of transmitted or
received tone frequencies, the '0' display is not significant and is
presented only to show that the calibration mode is in effect.
Calibration may be checked at any time without altering the state of
the existing link.
Commands available in the calibration routine are:
<SPACE> Toggles the transmitted audio between â€˜markâ€™ (low) and
â€˜spaceâ€™ (high) tones.
D Alternates the transmitted mark and space tones at a
rate set by the radio baud (HB) rate.
K Toggles the PTT line between ON and OFF.
Q Quits the calibration routine.
HOIQ: Set 'D" OFF to transmit a continuous mark or space tone.
5~20 PKBB-102

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CANLINE â€˜nâ€™ Hnemonic: CAN Default: $18 <CTRL-X>
Eagagetgrs:
â€˜n' - O to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
CANLINE changes the CANCEL-LINE 1591,15 ggjgigg gggmgg character. Like
all other input editing features, line cancellation is disabled in
Transparent Mode.
The parameter â€˜n' is the ASCII code for the character you want to use
to cancel an input line. You can enter the code in either hex or dec-
imal. For example, either of the following commands sets the cancel-
line character to <CTRL- U>.
0 CANLINE $15 (hex), CANLINE 21 (decimal)
When you use the CANLINE character to cancel an input line in Command
Mode, the line is terminated with a <BACKSIASH> character and new
prompt (cmdz) appears.
When you cancel a line in Converse Mode, only the <BACKS1ASH> and a
new line appear.
o You can cancel only the line you are currently typing.
0 Once <CR> has been typed, you cannot cancel an input line using
the cancel~line character.
o Use the CANPAC character to cancel the entire packet.
QOLEI lf your sendâ€”packet character is not <CR>, the cancel-line
character cancels only the last line of a multi-line packet.
5-21 PK88-103

CANPAC 'n' Mnemonic: CAN? Default: $19 <CTRL-Y>
 =
'n' - 0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
CANPAC changes the CANCEL-PACKET input g_1Lt1L1g command character.
The parameter 'n' is the ASCII code for the character you want to type
in order to cancel an input packet.
o You can enter the code in either hex or decimal.
When you cancel a packet in Converse Mode, the line is terminated with
a <BACKSLASH> character and a new line.
o You can only cancel the packet that is currently being entered.
Once you have typed the send-packet character, or waited PACTIHE (if
CPACTIHE is enabled), the packet cannot be canceled even if it has not
been transmitted.
Like other input editing features, packet cancellation is disabled in
Transparent Mode.
The CANCEL-PACKET character also cancels the display output in Command
Mode. If you are in Command Mode and type the CANCEL-PACKET charac-
ter, any characters that would be typed on the screen (except those
echoed) are â€˜thrown awayâ€˜ by the PK~88.
o Typing the cancel-output character a second time restores normal
output.
o To see how this works type DISPLAY, then type a <CTRL-Y>.
The command list display will stop. You won't see any response from
the PK-88 to commands.
To verify that the display is back to normal, type <CTR-L-Y>, and then
type DISPIAY again.
Use the CANCEL-DISPLAY feature if you inadvertently do something that
causes the PK-88 to generate large amounts of output to the terminal,
such as giving the DISPLAY command or setting TRACE ONâ€˜
o If you are in Converse or Transparent Mode and want to cancel
display output, you must exit to Command Mode and then type the
CANCEI.- PACKET character.
5-22 PK88- 104

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COHAND SUMARY
CASEDISP 'n' Mnemonic: CAS Default: 0 (as is)
EGYSMECEISI
'n' - 0 to 2 specifies how the PK-88 sends characters to your
terminal.
CASEDISP allows you to set the case of the characters the PK-88 sends
to your terminal. This may be helpful with certain terminal programs.
CASEDISP is disabled in Transparent mode.
CASEDISP offers three choices:
CASEDISP 0 â€˜As isâ€˜ ~ received characters are not changed.
CASEDISP 1 Received characters are forced to lower case.
CASEDISP 2 Received characters are forced to upper case.
CASEDISP has Q effect on your transmitted data.
CBELL ONIOFF Mnemonic: CB Default: OI-â€˜F
farameterst
ON - Three BELL characters <CTRL-G> ($07) are sent to your ter-
minal with both the â€˜*** CONNECTED tn (call sign)â€˜ and the
'*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign) messages.
OFF - BELLS are NOT sent with the CONNECTED and DISCONNECTED
messages.
o Set CBELL ON if you want to be notified whenever someone connects
to or disconnects from your station.
0 If CBELL is ON and MFILTER contains the character ($07), you can
be sure that whenever your terminal beeps there is e connection
for you. At no other time will you hear a beep while you are in
packet mode.
5-23 PK88-105

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CFROH all,none,yes/no calll[,cal12..] Mnemonic: CF Default: all
Paramg ters :
call - all, none, YES_list, NO_list.
list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas.
CFROM uses arguments to determine how the PK-88 responds to connect
requests ~ which calls are accepted and which calls are rejected.
CI-â€˜ROM is set to 'all' when you start the PK-88 for the first time.
CFROM ALL/NONE is synonymous with the CONOK ONIOFF command used in
older packet controllers and can be used interchangeably if required.
Type CFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES_list/N0_list status of station
call signs to be rejected or accepted. You can use the abbreviated
command form or mnemonic:
cmd : cf rom
CFROM all
cmd : cf
CFROM yes WXlAAA,WX2BBB,WX3CCC,WX4DDD
To reject all call requests, type CFROM NONE. Your PK-88 sends the
calling station a DM packet, or â€˜busy signal.â€˜ The caller sees:
*** MYCALL busy
*** DISCONNECTED2 (call Sign)
Your PK-88 notifies you of these call requests:
*** Connect request: WXIAAA
To accept calls from one or more specific stations, type CFROM (YES
followed by a list of calls signs). Connect requests will be  1
from stations whose call signs are listed.
To reject calls from one or more specific stations, type CFROM (NO
followed by a list of call signs). Connect requests will be giied
from stations whose call signs are listed.
You can include optional SSIDs or extensions specified as â€˜-n' after
the call sign. If CFROM is set to â€˜no WXlABG' or â€˜yes WXlABG,' any
combination WXIABC, WXIABC-1, . . .WXlABC-l5 will be matched and pro-
cessed. If CFROM is set to â€˜yes WXLABC-l' or â€˜no WXIABC-1,â€™ then ogly
WXIABC-l will match and be processed_
You can send your own connect command if you wish to chat with the
calling station even though his/her call request has been rejected.
Clear C!-â€˜ROM with '\,' '&,' or 'OFF' as arguments.
5-24 PK88-l06

PK~88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CHCALL ON|Ol-â€˜F Hnemonic: CHC Default: Ol-â€˜F
Parameter '
s
ON - Call sign of the distant station IS displayed in multiple
connection operation.
OFF - Call sign of the distant station is NOT displayed
CHCALL displays the call sign of the â€˜connected-toâ€˜ station after the
channel identifier.
Set CHCALL ON if you intend to operate multiple connections (as op-
posed to having your 'host' computer operate multiple connections).
CHCALL is especially useful when operating with multiple connections.
Using CHCALL is similar to using MRPT to show digipeat paths when mon-
itoring the channel.
In the following examples, the â€˜equals signâ€˜ (â€”) is assumed to be the
channel-changing character selected using the CHSWITCH command (in
this case, CHSWITCH is set to decimal value 61).
o CHCALL OFF Â» the monitored activity looks like this:
-Ozhi howie
hello ted how goes it?
-l:*** CONNECTED to HA7GXD
-lrmust be a dx record. ge lyle
-l:unreal ted! flâ€”az no digls!
-lzbig band opening. . .ge
o CHCALL ON ~ the same activity looks like the following example.
The additional information shown as a result of setting CHCALL ON
is underlined.
-0:l(loNâ€˜1â€˜A:hi howie
hello ted how goes it?
-l:WA7GXD:*** CONNECTED to NA7GXD
-ltmust be a dx record. ge lyle
-l:unreal ted! fl-az no digis
-l:WA7GXD:big band opening. . .ge
With Cl-{CALL ON, '-l' becomes '-1:<cal1 sign>Zâ€˜
N015: To switch channels during your multi-connect conversations,
type CHSWITCH characters '-0' and '-l' without a ':' after
them.
5-25 PK88-107

PK-88 OP
ERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUEMARY
CHDOUBLE ON|0l-â€˜F Hnemonic: Cl-ID Default: OFF
Paramgtgrsl
ON - Received GHSUITCH characters appear twice (doubled).
OFF - Received CHSWXTCH characters appear once (not doubled).
Cl-IDOUBLE displays received CHSWITCH characters as doubled characters.
In the following example CHDOUBLE is ON and CHSWITCH is set to '|':
|| this is a test.
The sending station actually transmitted:
| this is a test.
The same frame received with CHDOUBLE OFF would be displayed as:
| this is a test.
0 Set CHDOUBLE ON When operating with multiple connections to tell
the difference between CHSWITCH characters received from other
stations and CHSWITCH characters generated by your PK-B8.
NOIE: Cl-{SWITCH characters must Q9; be one of the channel numbers
(O to 9).
5-26 r|<aa- we

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUWHARY
CHGK 'n' Hnemonic: CH Default: 30
2Â§IÂ£Â£Â§Â£IÂ§3
'n' - 0 to 250 specifies the check time in tenâ€”second intervals.
0 - Zero disables this feature.
CHECK sets a timeout value for a packet connection, and depends on the
setting of AX2SL2V2.
Without the CHECK feature, if your PK-88 were linked or 'connected'
to another station and the other station seemed to 'disappear,' your
PK-88 would remain in the connected state indefinitely, refusing con-
nections from other stations.
This might happen if propagation changes unexpectedly or an intermedi-
ate digipeater station fails or is shut down while you and the distant
station are connected â€˜viaâ€™ that digipeater.
Your PK-88 tries to prevent this situation from occurring by sending a
new ggggggg ggggggg packet when RELINK is ON and the specified time
elapses without any packets being heard from the other TNC.
If RELINK is ON, when a pre-Version 2 link is inactive for (CHECK
times ten seconds), your PKÂ»88 tries to save the link by starting a
recgggect Â§eguegce. The PK-88 enters the â€˜connect in progressâ€˜ state
and sends SABM (Connect Request) frames. in addition, the PK-88 adds
a random time of up to 30 seconds each time CHECK is used.
o If AKZQLZXQ is Qï¬‚ and packets have not been heard from the dis-
tant end for 'n' times 10 seconds, your PK-88 sends a â€˜check
packetâ€˜ to test if the link still exists to the other station.
The â€˜check' packet frame contains no information, but is interpreted
by the distant station's TNC to see if it is still connected. If the
distant station's TNC 1; still connected, the distant station sends an
appropriate response packet.
If your PK-88 initiates the â€˜checkâ€™ and does not get an answer after
RETRY+1 attempts, the PK-88 starts a reconnect sequence just as if you
had typed the CONNECT command. If RELINK is OFF, the PK-88 goes to a
disconnected state.
o If AKZQLZEZ 1Â§ QEE and the other station has not been heard for
'n' times 10 seconds, your PK-88 does not test the link to the
distant station; your PK-88 sends a reconnect packet just as if
you had typed the CONNECT command.
5-27 PKBB-109

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CHSWITCH 'n' Hnemonic: CHS Default: $00
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to $FF (0 to 255 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
CHSWITCH selects the characters used by both the PK-88 and the user to
show that a new connection channel is being addressed.
The character can be PASSed in CONVERS mode. This character is always
ignored as a user-initiated channel switch in TRANSPARENT mode; it
just flows through as data.
o The outgoing channel cannot be changed while active or â€˜on-lineâ€˜
in TRANSPARENT mode.
o To switch channels, ESCAPE to Command Mode, then enter Converse
Mode to use the CHSWITCH command.
NOTE: When using the PK-88 with an electronic mail system, PBBS,
or other type of host or file server, change the CHSUITCH
character to $00 to avoid possible problems with the charac-
ters frequently found in some types of data files.
See CHDOUBLE and CHCALL for further use of CHSUITCH.
CLKADJ n Hnemonic: CLK Default: O (zero)
Earame ters:
'n' - 0 to 65535 specifies a correction factor to be applied to
the real~time clock routine
CLKADJ provides a limited ability to correct the PK-88's real-time
clock.
A value of '0' (zero) is a special case and means that NO correction
will be applied. If the value of CLKADJ is anything other than zero,
then the correction factor is calculated as:
relative clock speed in 8 - 100 - (9.l6667 * l/n)
The real-time clock routine keeps track of year, month, day, hour,
minute and second as specified in the DAYTIME command.
NOEQ: The real~time clock is not intended to serve as your station
reference clock; it is useful for approximate time-stamping
information in packet operation.
5-28 PK8B-110

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CHDTIHE 'n' Hnemonic: CM Default: 10
Â£Â§Â§8EÂ§Câ‚¬IÂ§Z
'n' - 0 to 250 specifies timeout value in 100-millisecond inter-
vals while in Transparent Mode.
If 'n' is O (zero), exit from Transparent Mode requires sending the
BREAK signal or interrupting power to the PK-88.
CMDTIHE sets the timeout value in Transparent Mode. A guard time of
'n' seconds allows escape to Command Mode from Transparent Mode, while
permitting any character to be sent as data.
The same Command Mode entry character (default <CTRL~C>) used to exit
from the Converse Mode is used to exit Transparent Mode, although the
procedure is different.
o The Command Mode entry character is set by COMMAND.
o Three Command Mode entry characters must be entered less than 'n'
seconds apart, with no intervening characters, after a delay of
'n' seconds following the last characters typed.
0 After a final delay of 'n' seconds, the PK-88 exits Transparent
Mode and enters Command Mode.
o You will then see the normal Command Mode prompt:
cmd:
The following diagram illustrates this timing:
last first second third PK-88
terminal command command command now in
input mode mode mode Command
| entry entry entry Mode
I character character character |
I I I I I
X.._
---longer-â€”->]<-shorter->|<-shorter->|<-----n----->|
than 'n' than 'n' than 'n'
5-29 PK88-lll

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CHSG 0N|0FF Hnemonic: CHS Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The stored CTEXT message is sent as the first packet after a
connection is established by a connect request from a dis-
tant station.
OFF - The text message is not sent at all
CMSG enables or disables automatic transmission of the CTEXT message
when your PK-88 accepts a connect request from another station.
o Set CMSG ON to tell callers that you are ggg available to answer
calls manually when they connect to your PK-88.
o Set CMSG OFF when available to operate or answer calls manually.
COMMAND 'n' Hnemonic: COM Default: $03 <CTRL-C>
Earameters:
'n' - O to $7F (O to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
COMMAND is used to change the Command Mode entry character. You can
enter the code in either hexadecimal or decimal numbers.
Type the COWMAND character to enter Command Mode from Converse Mode.
No response is seen if you type the Command Mode entry character while
you are already in Command Mode.
0 Enter Converse Mode by typing: CONVERSE
Now, all characters typed on the keyboard and characters send from a
disk or tape file are transmitted as packet data.
Type <CTRL-C>. The Command Mode prompt appears, indicating successful
exit to Comand Mode. The display might look like this:
cmd:CONVERSE
Hello world! This is a test transmission. [type <CTRL-C>]
cmd:
See CMDTIME or the discussion of Transparent Mode for instructions on
the Command Mode entry character to escape from Transparent Mode.
5.30 PK8B-112

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COWMAND SUMMARY
CONHODE CONVERS{TRANS Mnemonic: CONN Default: CONVERS
Earameters:
CONVERS - The PK-88 automatically enters Qonverse Hgdg when a
connection is established.
TRANS - The PK-B8 automatically enters Transparent Mode when
a connection is established.
CONMODE selects the mode the PK-88 uses after entering the CONNECTED
state.
The connection may result either from a connect request received from
a distant station, or a connection initiated by a CONNECT command that
you've typed.
0 Set CONMODE C0 CONVERS for most packet operations.
o Set CONMODE to TRANS if you are using Transparent Mode for a bul>
letin board program, so that the correct mode will be entered
when your bulletin board receives a connect request.
o If the PK-88 is already in Converse or Transparent Mode when the
connection is completed, the mode will not he changed.
NQTE2 Set CONMODE to TRANS for KISS/TCP/IP operation.
5-31 PK88-ll3

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUHARY
CONNECT calll [VIA call2[,call3...,cal19]] Immediate Command
garage QEESI
calll - Call sign of the distant station to which you wish to
be connected.
call2 - Optional call sign(s) of up to eight digipeaters via
which you'll be repeated to reach the distant station.
CONNECT sends a connect request to station 'calll,' directly or via
one or more digipeaters. Each call sign can include an optional SSID
or extension â€˜n,' immediately after the call sign.
The part of the command line shown in brackets below is optional. The
double-bracketed text ,'call3...,cal19' is also optional and is used
only when â€˜VIA call2â€˜ is used, that is, when connecting through one or
more digipeaters. (The brackets and quotation marks are used in this
text only for clarity - please don't type them!)
VIA cal12[, cal13...,call9]
o Type the digipeater fields in the exact sequence you wish to use
to route your packets to destination station 'cal1l.'
If you type CONNECT while the PK-88 is connected, or trying to connect
to or disconnect from a distant station, your monitor will show:
Link state is: CONNECT in progress
If the distant station does not 'ack' your connect request after the
number of tries specified by RETRY, the CONNECT command is canceled.
Your monitor displays:
*** Retry count exceeded
*** DISCONNECTEDI (call sign)
To connect directly to WXlAAA, type:
cmd:CONNECT WXIAAA (or C WXlAAA)
To connect to WXlAAA using WXZBBB (with whom you can easily connect )
and WX3CCC (who is near HXIAAA) as digipeaters, type:
cmd:CONNECT WXIAAA VIA UX2BBB,WX3CCC
Type CONNECT or 'C' without arguments to see the link status and the
number of unacknowledged, outstanding packets.
5-32 PK88-llh

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMARY
CONOK 0N]OFF Mnemonic: CONO Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - Functions identically to CFROM ALL.
OFF - Functions identically to CFROM NONE.
CONOK ONIOFF is synonymous with CFROH ALL/NONE and is provided for
compatibility with terminal programs and other applications requiring
this specific command used in older packet controllers.
CFROM must have been previously set to either ALL or NONE to use this
command.
CONPERH ON|OFF Mnemonic: CON? Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The current connection on the current channel is not allowed
to enter the disconnected state.
OFF - The current channel can be connected to and disconnected
from other stations.
When ON, CONPERM forces the PK-88 to maintain the current connection,
even when frames to the other station exceed RETRY attempts for an
acknowledgment. RESTART and power off/on cycling do not affect this
connected state.
CONPERH can he set only when a connection is established or when a
connection is in progress (being established). CONPERH functions on a
channelâ€”by-channel basis when multiple connections are allowed.
CONPERM allows connections on other channels to operate normally. For
example, automatic disconnect based on RETRY, when used under condi-
tions such as:
o Certain networking applications
o Noisy, less reliable links
5-33 PK88-115

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CONSTAHP 0N|OFF Mnemonic: CONS Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Connect status messages ARE time stamped.
OFF - Connect status messages are NOT time stamped.
CONSTAMP activates time stamping of *** CONNECTED status messages.
If CONSTAMP is ON and DAYTIME (the PK-88's internal clock) is set,
date and time information generated in the PK-88 is available for
electronic mail programs or other host computer applications.
Date and time must be set initially by the DAYTIME command before time
stamping will occur. For example, if CONSTAMP is ON and the date and
time have been set in the PK-88, a connect and disconnect sequence
appears as follows:
cmd:connect wxlaaa
10:55:23 *** CONNECTED to UXIAAA
cmd:disconnect
10:55:59 *** DISCONNECTED: NXIAAA
The CONNECT and DISCONNECT command can be abbreviated as shown below.
The results are identical.
cmdzc wxlaaa
10:56:22 *** CONNECTED to WXlAAA
cmdzd
10:56:32 *** DISCONNECTED: UXIAAA
CONVERSE Mnemonic: CONV or K Immediate Command
CONVERSE is an immediate command that causes the PK-B8 to switch from
the Command Mode into the Converse Mode.
When the PK-88 is in the Converse Mode, all characters typed from the
keyboard or sent from a disk file are processed and transmitted by
your radio.
0 To return the PK-88 to the Command Mode from the Converse Mode,
type the Command Mode entry character (default is <CTRLâ€”C>).
5-35 PK88-116

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
CPACTIHE ON[OFF Mnemonic: CP Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Packet transmit timer IS used in Converse Mode.
OFF - Packet transmit timer is NOT used in Converse Mode.
CPACTIHE activates automatic, periodic transmission of packets while
in Converse Mode.
CPACTIME can be used for several types of computer communications such
as electronic mail systems, bulletin board or host computer operation
when full Transparent Mode features are not desiredâ€˜
When CPACTIME is ON, characters are packetized and transmitted period-
ically as they are in Transparent Mode. Local keyboard editing and
display features of the Converse Mode are available; software flow
control can be used.
o See the PACTIME command, (which controls the rate and mode of
packet assembly) for a discussion of how periodic packetizing
works.
o Set ACRPACK OFF in this mode.
When ACRPACK is ON, the send-packet character is inserted in the data
being packetized even though it was not typed.
o To include <CR> characters in transmitted packets, set SENDPAC to
a character not normally used (e.g., <Câ€™i'RL-P>); the PKÂ»88 then
treats a <CR> as an ordinary character.
o Set CPACTIME ON for an operation similar to full break-in CH.
Setting CPACTIME ON transmits your text soon after you type it, in
short bursts of a few characters. The other station may break in at
will. Some operators find it easier to chat in this mode. Delays are
eliminated while long packets are being typed.
CR ON|OFF Mnemonic: CR Default: ON
Parame ters :
ON - The send-packet character, normally <CR>, IS added to all
packets sent in Converse Mode.
OFF - The send-packet character is NOT added to packets.
CR is synonymous with ACRPACK and is used in the same manner as the
newer command. Either command word has the same effect.
5-35 PK88-117

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUWMARY
CSTATUS Mnemonic: CS Immediate Command
CSTATUS is an immediate command used in multiple connections. When
CSTATUS is typed, your monitor displays:
OOOO
(See counzan.)
The number of each logical channel.
The link state of all ten logical channels.
The current input/output channel - the one you're using.
Whether each channel connection is 'permanent.'
Depending on your use of multiple connections and the USERS command,
CSTATUS will show you the
g coumzcma Q g STATION
cmdzcs
Ch. 0 - IO
Ch. l -
Â¢h_ .
Ch. -
Ch -
Ch. -
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
Ch. - DISCONNECTED
Ch. - DISCONNECTED
Ch. - DISCONNECTED
Ch. â€” DISCONNECTED
wmwmwkuw
following displays:
Ch. O
Ch. l
Ch.
Ch.
Ch
Ch.
Ch.
Ch.
Ch.
Ch.
\aoo\|a~u|L\wr~.>
CONNECTED tn
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
CONNECTED IQ QNLY l STATION
cmd:cs
WXIAAA
If you're connected to several stations, the CSTATUS command shows
your connect status as follows:
CONNECTED IQ SEVERAL STATIONS
cmdzcs
Ch. 0 ~ IO
Ch. 1 -
Ch. -
Ch. -
Ch -
Ch. -
Ch. ~
Ch. -
Ch. -
Ch. -
\D@\|l7\kJIJ-â€˜MIIQ
This sample display shows
CONNECTED to
CONNECTED to
CONNECTED to
CONNECTED to UXADDD
CONNECT in progress
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
WXlAAA
WXZBBB
WX3CCC
P
CONNECTED to WXSEEE via WXGFFF
DISCONNECTED
DISCONNECTED
that:
o CHANNEL 0 has the input and output channels - you're using it!
0 CHANNEL 1 is connected to WXZBBB â€˜permanently.
o All other channelsâ€˜ states are shown as they might appear with
multiple connections.
5~36 PK88-ll8

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
GTEXT text Hnemonic: CT Default: See sample
Parameters:
text Any combination of characters and spaces up to a maximum of
120 characters.
CTEXT is the â€˜automatic answerâ€˜ text you type in to a special section
of the PK-88's memory.
The default text says, â€˜Please leave a message, then disconnect.â€˜
If CMSG is set ON:
o The CTEXT message is sent as soon as another station connects to
your station.
To type multiple-line CTEXT messages and include a carriage return
(<CR>) character in your text, use the PASS character (<CTRL-V> is the
default value) immediately preceding the carriage return (see the PASS
command).
A typical CTEXT message might be:
We're away for the weekend. <CTRL-V> <CR>
Please leave your message, then disconnect <CR>
0 If you enter a text string longer than 120 characters, an error
message appears and the command is ignored.
?too long
cmd:
o Use a percent sign (3), an ampersand (&), â€˜N,â€™ 'N0,"NONE,' or
'OFF' as the first characters in the CTEXT message to clear the
previous message without having to type a RESET command.
5-37 PK88-119

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
DAYTIME date&time Mnemonic: DA Default: not set
Parameters:
date&time * Current DATE and TIME to set.
DAYTIME sets the PK-88's internal clock current date and time. The
date&time parameter is used in Packet Mode by the commands CONSTAMP
and MSTAMP to â€˜time stampâ€™ received and monitored messages.
Entries in the 'heard' (displayed by MEARD) are also time stamped if
date&time has been set. The PK-88's time is updated continuously, as
long as it is powered up.
The clock is not set when the PKÂ»88 is turned on. The DAYTIME com-
mand displays the following error message:
cmd:day
?c10ck not set
0 You must reset date and time each time you turn on the PK-88.
Otherwise CONSTAMP and MSTAMP will not 'stamp' the time.
If you type DAYTIME without a parameter, the PK-88 displays current
date and time information. The format of the display is:
dd-mm-yy hh:mm:ss
cmd:day
DAYTIME O8-Jul-86 06:57:33
0 The format for entering the date&time is:
yymmddhhmmss
cmd:daytime 860708065930
where:
yy is the last two digits of the year
mm is the two-digit month code (01-12)
dd is date (O1-31)
hh is the hour (O0-23)
mm is the minutes after the hour (O0-59)
ss is the seconds after the minute (00-59)
o Enter the numbers 0-9 with leading zeros; codes must be exactly
two digits.
o Be aware of the month when you set the date - the PK-88 does not
check for the correct number of days in a month.
5-38 PK68-120

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMARY
DAYSTAHP ONIOFF Mnemonic: DAYS Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The DATE is included in CONSTAMP and HSTAMP.
OFF - Only the TIME is included in CONSTAMP and MSTAMP.
DAYSTAMP activates the date in CONSTAHP and MSTAHP.
0 Set DAYSTAMP ON when you want a dated record of packet channel
activity, or when you are unavailable for local packet operation.
DELETE 0N|0FF Mnemonic: DEL Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The <DELETE> ($7F) key is used for editing your typing.
OFF - The <BACKSPACE> ($08) key is used for editing your typing.
Use the DELETE command to select the key to use for deleting while
editing.
0 Type the selected DEL key to delete the last character from the
input lineâ€˜
You cannot use the DEL key to delete text before the beginning of a
line. Use the PASS character to delete <CR> characters that have been
typed into the text.
o The BKONDEL command controls how the PK-88 indicates deletion.
0 To see a corrected display of the current line after deleting
characters, type the redisplay-line character, which is set by
the REDISPLA command.
5-39 PK88-121

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL GOMAND QUMMARY
DPROH all,nune,yes/no calll[,call2..] Hnemonic: DF Default: all
Pagamgters:
call - all, none, YES list, N0 list.
list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas.
DFROM uses arguments to determine how the PK-88 responds to stations
trying to use your station as a digipeater - which stations will be
repeated and which stations will not be repeated. DFROH is set to
'al1' when you start the PK-88 for the first time.
DFROH ALL/NONE is synonymous with the DIGIPEAT 0N|OFF command used in
older packet controllers and can be used interchangeably as required.
Type DFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES_list/NO_list status of station
call signs whose packets will or will not be repeated. You can use
the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmd:dfrom
DFROM all
cmd:df
DFROM yes WXlAAA,WX2BBB,WX3CCC,WX4DDD
To prevent all stations from using your station as a digipeater, type
DFROM NONE.
To permit one or more specific stations to digipeat through your
station, type DFROM (YES followed by a list of calls signs). Packets
will be digipeated only from and to stations whose call signs are
listed.
To prevent one or more specific stations from digipeating through your
station, type DFROM (NO followed by a list of call signs). Packets
will QQL be digigeated only from and to stations whose call signs are
listed.
You can include optional SSlDs or extensions specified as â€˜â€”n' after
the call sign.
If DFROM is set to â€˜no WX1AAA' or â€˜yes WXIAAAâ€˜, combinations WXIAAA,
WX1AAA>i,...WXlAAA-l5 will be matched and processed.
If DFROM is set to â€˜yes WXlAAA~l' or â€˜no WXIAAA-1,â€˜ then only WXIAAA-l
will match and be processed.
Clear DFROM with '%,' '&,' or 'OFF' as arguments.
5-60 PK88-122

PK-EB OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
DIGIPEAT Mnemonic: DIG Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - Equivalent to DFROM ALL
OFF > Equivalent to DFROM NONE
In host computer applications that use a Boolean parameter switching
routine rather than numeric values, the DIGIPEAT command can be used
with ON and OFF instead of ALL or NONE.
This alternate DIGIPEAT command is appropriate in certain electronic
mail and bulletin board systems.
Note that DIGIPEAT ON and OFF as Boolean commands do not provide the
same capability for selective digipeating as with DFROM YES(oalls) and
DFROM NO(calls).
DISCONNE Mnemonic: D Immediate Command
DISCONNE is an immediate command that initiates a disconnect request
to the station to which you are connected.
If your disconnect command is successful, your monitor will display:
*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)
Other commands can be entered while a disconnect is in progress. New
connections are not allowed until the disconnect is completed.
o If the retry count is exceeded while waiting for the distant sta-
tion to acknowledge your disconnect command, your PK-88 switches
to the disconnected state.
0 If another disconnect command is entered while your PK>88 is try-
ing to disconnect, the retry count is immediately set to the max-
imum number. In either case, your monitor displays:
*** Retry count exceeded
*** DISGONNECTED: (call sign)
Disconnect messages are not displayed when the PK-88 is in the
Transparent Mode.
5-41 PK88-123

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
COMAND SUMMARY
DISPLAY [class] Mnemonic: DISP Immediate Command
Parameters:
class - Optional parameter
(A)sync display
(C)haracter display
(I)d display
(L)ink display
(M)onitor display
(T)iming display
(Z) display
identifier, one of the following:
asynchronous port parameters
special characters
ID parameters
link parameters
monitor parameters
timing parameters
the entire command/parameter list
DISPIAY is an immediate command.
When DISPLAY is typed without a parameter, the PK-88 responds with:
cmd:DISPLAY A,C,I,L,M,T,Z
cmd:
You can display subgroups of related system parameters by specifying
the optional class
cmd:disp a
BBITCONV OFF
ACRDISP BO
AFILTER OFF
ALFDISP OFF
AWLEN 7
CASEDISP O
ECHO ON
ESCAPE OFF
FLOW ON
ILFPACK OFF
NUCR OFF
NULF OFF
NULLS 0
PARITY 3
TBAUD 1200
TRFLOW OFF
TXFLDW OFF
XFLOH ON
cmd:
â€˜PBTEITIE CEITI
Individual system parameter values can be displayed by entering the
parameter name without options.
cmd: mycall
HYCALL NXIAAA
cmd:frack cmd:dwait
FRACK 3 DWAIT 16
5-b2 PK88-124

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
DWAIT 'n' Mnemonic: DU Default: 16
Parameters:
'n' - O to 250 specifies default wait time in ten~millisecond
intervals.
DWAIT helps avoid collisions with digipeated packets.
Unless the PK-88 is waiting to send digipeated packets, DNAIT forces
the PK-88 to pause after last hearing data on the channel, for the
duration of the DWAIT (Default Wait) time, before beginning its trans-
mitter keyÂ»up sequence.
Wherever possible, the value of DWAIT should be agreed on by all sta-
tions in a local area when digipeaters are used in the area. The best
value will be determined by experimenting.
DNAIT is a function of the key-up time (TXDELAY) of the digipeater sta-
tions and helps alleviate the drastic reduction of throughput that
occurs on a channel when digipeated packets suffer collisions.
DWAIT is necessary because digipeated packets are not retried by the
digipeater, but are always restarted by the originating station. When
all stations specify a default wait time, and the right value of 'n'
is chosen, the digipeater captures the frequency every time it has
data to send - digipeated packets are sent without this delay.
Recommended settings of DWAIT for different types of packet station
operation are:
TYPE QE OPERATION TIME {in ms) DNAIT VALUE
Digipeaters 0 0
Local keyboards 160 l6 (default)
PBBSs, Hosts 320 32
File transfers h80 Q8
Your PK-88 always uses a DWAIT value of 0 (zero) when you digipeat
someone else's packet. If DWAIT is set to any other value, the PK-88
simply ignores itâ€˜
NOTE: DWAIT is inoperative when PPERSIST is ON as in KISS/TCP/IP
operation.
5-A3 PK88-125

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
ECHO ON|0FF Mnemonic: E Default: ON
EQYHIIIQ CEYS I
ON - Characters received from the computer or terminal ARE echoed
by the PK-88.
OFF - Characters are NOT echoed.
The ECHO command controls local echoing by the PKâ€”8B when it is in
Command or Converse Mode. Local echoing is disabled in Transparent
Mode.
o Set ECHO ON if you do not see your typing appear on your display.
o Set ECHO OFF if you see each character you type doubled.
ECHO is set correctly when you see the characters you type displayed
correctly.
ESCAPE ON|OFF Mnemonic: ES Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The <ESCAPE> character ($18) is output as '$' ($2b).
OFF - The <ESCAPE> character is output as <ESCAPE> ($15).
The ESCAPE command selects the character to be output when an <ESCAPE>
character is to be sent to the terminal. The <ESCAPE> translation is
disabled in Transparent Mode.
The ESCAPE character selection is provided because some computers and
terminal emulators interpret the <ESCAPE> character as a special com-
mand prefix. Such terminals may alter their displays depending on the
characters following the <ESCAPE>.
o Set ESCAPE ON if your terminal requires it to avoid unexpected
text strings from other packet operators.
0 See the MFILTER command for information on character stripping
(rather than character translation) in monitored packets.
5-Ah PK88-126

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
FLOW ONIOFF Mnemonic: F Default: ON
Parameters 2
ON - Type-in flow control IS active.
OFF - Typeâ€”in flow control is NOT active.
When FLOW is ON, type-in flow control is active. Any character typed
on your keyboard causes output from the PK-88 to the terminal to stop
until any of the following conditions exist:
0 A packet is forced (in Converse Mode)
0 A line is completed (in Command Mode)
o The packet length (See PACLEN) is exceeded
o The terminal output buffer fills up
Canceling the current conunand or packet or typing the redisplay-line
character also causes output to resume. Type-in flow control is not
used in Transparent Mode.
Setting FLDN ON prevents inbound or received data from interfering
with your keyboard data entry. If you (and the person you are talking
to) normally wait for a packet from the other end before starting to
respond, you can set FLOW OFF.
o Some electronic mail and packet bulletin board systems may Work
best with FLOW set to OFF.
0 Some interface boards or computers with â€˜software UARTs' may be
unable to send and receive data at the same time. If you are
using that type of computer, set FLOW to ON.
5-b5 PK88-127

PK~88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
FRACK 'nâ€˜ Mnemonic: FR Default: 3
Parameters:
â€˜n' â€” l to 15, specifying frame acknowledgment time-out in one-
second intervals.
FRACK is the Fkame ACKnowledgment time in seconds that your PK-88
will wait for acknowledgment of the last-sent protocol frame before
resending or 'retrying' that frame.
After sending a packet requiring acknowledgment, the PK-88 waits for
FRACK seconds timeout before incrementing the retry counter and sendÂ»
ing the frame again. If the packet address includes digipeat instruc-
tions, the time between retries is adjusted to:
Retry interval â€” 'n' x (2 x m + 1)
where m is the number of intermediate relay stations.
When a packet is retried, a random wait time is added to any other
wait times in use. This avoids lockups in which two packet stations
repeatedly send packets which collide with each other.
FULLDUP ONIOFF Mnemonic: FU Default: OFF
ParameterÂ§:
ON ~ Full duplex mode is ENABLED.
OFF - Full duplex mode is DISABLED.
When full-duplex mode is disabled (default), the PK-88 uses the DCD
(Data Carrier Detect) signal from its modem to avoid collisions; the
PKÂ»88 acknowledges multiple packets in a single transmission with a
single acknowledgment.
When full-duplex mode is enabled, the PK-88 ignores the DCD signal and
acknowledges packets individually.
Full-duplex operation is useful for full-duplex radio operation, such
as through OSCAR l0 or dedicated traffic trunks. It should not be
used unless both your station and the distant station can operate in
full-duplex.
You may also find full-duplex mode useful for some testing operations,
such as analog or digital loopback tests.
5-46 PK88-128

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HBAUD 'n' Mnemonic: HB Default: l2OO bauds
Parameters:
'nâ€˜ values specifying the rate or signaling speed in bauds from the
PK-88 to the radio.
Available HDLC packet data rates 'n' include A5, S0, 57, 75, 100, 110,
150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19,200 bits per second.
o Example: HBAUD 300
HBAUD sets the radio (â€˜on-airâ€˜) baud rate only in the packet operating
mode. HBAUD has no relationship to your computer terminal program's
baud rate.
You must use the same radio data rate as the distant station.
NOTE: Modern terminology no longer refers to data rates in 'WPM.'
The term 'bauds' is used universally for FSK and AFSK using
monobit data. In these cases, the terms 'bauds' and â€˜bits
per secondâ€˜ mean the same thing. Either term is correct.
However, when using dibit or n-ary data such as DPSK or
QPSK, â€˜bits per secondâ€˜ will never be the same as â€˜bauds'.
HEADBRLN 0N|OFF Mnemonic: HEA Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The header for a monitored packet is printed on a separate
line from the packet text.
OFF - The header and the text of monitored packets are printed
on the same line.
HEADERLN affects the display of monitored packets. When HEADERLN is
OFF, the address information is shown on the same line as the packet
IZEXCI
HX1AAA>WX2BBB: Go ahead and transfer the file.
When HEADERLN is ON, the address is shown, followed by a <CR><LF> that
puts the packet text on a separate line:
UX1AAA>WX2BBBI
Go ahead and transfer the file.
If MRPT or MSTAMP are ON, set HEADERLN ON; long headers may extend
across your screen or page when these functions are active.
5â€”b7 PK88-129

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
HELP Mnemonic: H Immediate Command
While in Command Mode, type the command â€˜Hâ€˜ to read the abbreviated
on-line HELP file.
Your monitor displays the following brief list:
cmdzhelp
HELP:
CONNECT DISCONNE
CONVERSE TRANS
DISPLAY CALIBRAT
MMEARD CSTATUS
RESTART RESET
TCLEAR
cmd:
You can exit from your present operating mode and enter Command Mode
at any time to list the HELP text.
HID ONIOFF Mnemonic: HI Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 sends HDLC identification as a digipeater.
OFF - The PK-B8 does not send HDLC identification.
The HID command activates or disables the PK-88's automatic periodic
transmission of identification packets when operating as a digipeater.
This identification consists of an unsequenced I-frame with your sta-
tion identification (MYCALL) and MYALIAS in the data field.
o Set HID ON to force the PK-88 to send an ID packet every 9.5
minutes while used as a digipeatet.
0 Set HID OFF to stop the PK~88 from sending any ID packets.
0 The HID identification packet is addressed to "ID".
0 Your station identification is the call sign set with the HYCALL
command, with 'digipeaterâ€˜ appended.
For example, you've set MYCALL to UXIAAA-8 and HID is ON. The
resulting automatic identification transmission looks like:
WXIAAA-8>ID
(MYALIAS), WXIAAA digipeater
NOTE: You cannot change the 9i5-minute automatic interval timing.
S-48 PK88-130

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMARY
HOST ON|OFF Hnemonic: HOST Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 operates with a host computer or other special
application program.
OFF - The PK-88 operates as a normal AX.25 TNC.
The HOST command permits the PK-88 to operate in the Host Mode, a
â€˜computer~friend1y' communications mode, over the RS-232 link between
the PK-88 and a host computer.
In the Host Mode, the PK~88 sends data to the computer only when the
computer requests data. The data are prefaced with a special header
that identifies the type of information being sent.
Turning the PK<88 on or issuing a RESTART comand while in Host Mode
(HOST ON) causes the PK-88 to issue a RESTART response:
$01 $4? R T $00 $17
To cancel HOST mode, type three <CTRL-C> characters, or the sequence
<CTRL-A> O H O N <CTRL-W>. The BREAK character will not cancel HOST.
NOTE: Set HOST ON as the last command when preparing the PK-88 for
KISS/TCP/IP operation. See Chapter 6, Host Mode and Special
Applications, for more details.
HPOLL ON|OFF Mnemonic: HP Default: ON
Parame CE IS I
ON - In Host Mode, the host computer must poll the PK-88 for all
data.
OFF - The PK-88 sends data blocks to the host computer as they are
formed. Data poll is unnecessary.
The HPOLL command functions only in Host Mode and depends on specific
characteristics of each application operating in the host computer or
server.
Some application programs will poll the data controller as required.
In such cases, set HPOLL to OFF.
5-69 PK88â€”13l

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
ID Mnemonic: I Immediate Command
ID is an imediate command that sends a special identification packet.
The ID command allows you to send a final identification packet when
you take your station off the air. Note that HID must be set ON.
ID forces a final identification packet to be sent when a digipeater
station is taken off the air. The identification consists of an un-
numbered I-Frame, with its data field containing your MYALIAS (if any)
and your MYCALL station identification and the word 'digipeater.â€˜
o The ID identification packet is sent only if the digipeater has
transmitted since the last automatic identification.
o The ID identification packet is addressed to 'ID.'
0 Your station identification is the call sign you set with the
MYCALL command, with your MYALIAS, your main call sign and the
word â€˜digipeater' appended. The following example is shown as
seen with and without a MYALIAS, with MONITOR set to 6.
WX1ABC*>ID <UI> HX1ABC*>ID <UI>
WXIABC digipeater (MYALIAS), WXIABC digipeater
ILFPACK ONIOFF Mnemonic: IL Default: ON
Parame te rs :
ON - The PK-88 suppresses line feeds from the terminal.
OFF - The PK-88 transmits line feeds from the terminal
Use ILFPACK ON when transmitting a computer file containing line feeds
if the distant station does not want line feeds.
5-50 PK88-132

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
I0 'n' Mnemonic: I0 DeÂ£ault: none
Parameters:
n - a hexadecimal value used with the I/0 command to access the
PK-88's memory and I/0 locations, or read values stored at a
specified address.
The 1/0 command works with the ADDRESS command and permits acess to
memory and I/0 locations as follows:
ADDRESS Saabb
or SOH $411â€˜ A E S a a b b ETB (in the HOST mode).
where "aa" is the device address, and "bbâ€œ is the register address on
the device.
Use the I/0 command without arguments to read an I/O location, and
with one argument $0 to SFF to write to an I/O location. The value in
ADDRESS is not incremented after using the I/0 command.
K Mnemonic: K or CONV Immediate Command
The K command is synonymous with the CONVERSE conunand and places the
PK-88 in the Converse mode.
When the PK-88 is in the Converse Mode, all characters typed from the
keyboard or sent from a disk file are processed and transmitted by
your radio.
0 To return the PK-88 to the Command Mode from the Converse Mode,
type the Command Mode entry character (default is <C'1'RL-C>).
S-51 PK88-133

PK-38 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
KISS ONIOFF Mnemonic: KI Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 operates as a KISS TNC in Host Mode.
OFF - The PK-88 operates as a normal AX.25 Level 2 TNC
The most popular use of the KISS mode is running Phil Karnâ€˜s TCP/IP
protocol suite. Note that KISS ON is Q9; the only command that must be
set for TCP/IP operation. See Chapter 6 for further details.
The following commands must be entered only if the terminal word
length and parity are NOT 8 bits and NO parity:
AULEN 8
PARITY O
RESTART
The following commands must be entered if they have been changed from
the default values:
TRACE OFF
HID OFF
BEACON EVERY U
PACKET
The following commands must be entered.
CONMODE TRANS
PPERSIST ON
RAW ON
HPOLL OFF
KISS ON
HOST ON (NOTE: the HOST ON command must be entered last)
After entering Host Mode, you cannot use the normal human language or
verbose commands, nor will you see normal responses from the PK-88.
The host computer and its application program must assume control of
the PK-88. AX.25, TCP/IP or other protocols must be executed in the
host computer.
To quit the KISS mode, you must return to Command mode from Host Mode
in order to use the KISS OFF command.
In KISS and Raw HDLC modes. communication activity on the RS~232 link
is shown by illumination the STA and CON LEDs as follows:
Host to TNC Communication: STA LED illuminated.
TNC to host Communication: CON LED illuminated.
5-52 rxas-134

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
HAILDROP ON|0FF Hnemonic: MAI Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PKâ€”88 operates as a personal HailDrop.
OFF â€” The PK-88 operates as a normal AX.25 Level 2 TNC
The PK-88's Mai1Drop is a small personal mailbox that uses a subset of
the well-known WORLI/WA7MBL packet BBS commands. When your HailDrop
feature is active, distant stations can connect to your PK-88, leave
messages for you or read messages from you. Third-party messages are
ggg accepted by your Mailbrop. All messages are considered "private".
Your MailDrop will accept inbound mail forwarding from WORLI/WA7MBL
auto~forvarding packet BBSs, but will ggg forward mail outbound.
Approximately 8000 bytes of RAH are available to your Mailbrop. The
entire 8000 byte RAM can be used for a single message or for up to a
maximum of 15 available message numbers (1-15). If all 8K of the RAM
is used, or if the maximum l5 messages have been filed, the HailDrop
displays the error message "*** No free memory". If there is enough
room, the Hai1Drop displays the MailDrop command prompt.
A power on/off or RESTART clears all messages from the RAM.
Mailbrop operation is completely under your "Sys0p" control from your
local terminal or computer keyboard. Only you can start and stop
HailDrop service. The commands shown below provide Hailbrop control.
Set MAILDROP to ON to start your Mailbrop operation. This command
activates or deactivates your HailDrop. The minimum command string is
MAI. Set MAILDROP OFF to deactivate your MailDrop. The default con-
dition is OFF.
Use the MDCHECK command to log on to your Mai1Drop while MAILDROP is
ON. See the MDCHECK, MDPROMPT and MDMON commands for additional in-
formation on Mailbrop operation.
While your MailDrop is active, or if you have logged on to your Mail-
Drop from your local keyboard with the MDCHECK command, the only com-
mands available to you and the calling station are:
KAWFXU
BYE Log off the MailDrop
KILL Kill or delete messages
LIST List the message directory
READ Read a specific message
SEND Send a message
Only the first letter of the command is significant; for example, S,
SP, ST and SB are all treated equally as the SEND command.
5-53 PKB8-135

PK B8 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMARY
HAXFRAE 'n' Mnemonic: MAX Default: A
Parameters:
'n' - l to 7 specifies a number of packet frames.
MAXFRAME sets an upper limit on the maximum number of unacknowledged
packets the PK-88 permits on the radio link at any one time.
MAXFRAME also sets the maximum number of contiguous packets the PK~88
will send during any given transmission.
If some, but not all, of the outstanding packets are acknowledged, a
smaller number may be transmitted the next time, or new frames may be
included in the retransmission, so that the total number of unacknow-
ledged packet frames does not exceed 'nH
The â€˜bestâ€™ value of HAXFRAME depends on your local channel conditions.
In most cases of keyboardâ€”to-keyboard direct or local operation (links
that don't require going through digipeaters), you can use the default
value HAXFRAME A .
NOTE: The FRACK counter begins counting from the first flag gf
each frame. If MAXI-â€˜RAME is set to 7 and PACLEN is set to
maximum (0), FRACK should be lengthened to prevent the dis-
tant station's ACK from colliding with a possibly-premature
retry.
when the amount of packet traffic, the path in use, the digipeaters
involved - or other variables not under your control - make packet
operation difficult (as shown by lots of retriesl), you can improve
your throughput by reducing MAXFRAHE.
Experimental evidence indicates that MAXFRAME l or 2 can sometimes
produce best throughput, especially on HF radio, when operating in
conditions of multipath propagation and numerous collisions.
o If packet traffic is heavy or the path is poor, reduce MAXFRAME
to 3,2 or L
o If the radio link is good, an optimal relationship exists between
the parameters set by these commands. The maximum number of data
characters outstanding should not exceed the receive buffer space
of the TNC receiving the data.
5-54 PK88-136

PK-83 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HBELL ON|OFF Mnemonic: MBE Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Ring the terminal when packets appear from callsigns listed
in MFROM or MTO.
OFF - Don't ring the terminal when packets appear from callsigns
listed in MFROM or HTO.
MBELL permits the terminal operator to be alerted when packet frames
from a selected station or group of stations appears on the monitored
radio link.
when MBELL is set to OFF, packet frames are monitored normally
according to the MFROM and MTO callsign lists.
When MBELL is set to ON, packet frames are monitored FROM and T0 all.
If callsigns in the monitored headers match the MFROM or MTO lists,
the PK-88 sends three BELL characters <CTRL-G> to the terminal.
Use MBELL ON to alert you to the presence of a specific station on the
radio channel. Examples of typical applications are:
To detect when station WXIAAA is present, set:
MBELL ON
MONITOR h
MFROM YES WAIXXX
MTO NONE.
0000
To detect a beacon or CQ call, set:
O O 0 0
MBELL ON
MONITOR 4
MFROM NONE
MTO YES CQ,BEACON
To return to normal operation, set
MBELL OFF
MONITOR A
MFROM ALL
MTO NONE
OOOO
Note that if MBX is active and MBELL is ON, because of redundant
I-frames, the PK-88 may send BELLS even when no data is displayed.
5-55 PK88~l37

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HBX cal1l[,call2][~'nâ€˜] Mnemonic: MB Default: empty
Parameters:
call - The call signs of one or two stations to be monitored.
'n' - alphanumerics indicating an optional SSID or extension.
The MBX command permits you to read or record useful or needed data
without having to connect or log on to the source station(s). Channel
occupancy and bandwidth are conserved on busy channels.
HBX filters the received packet data stream so that only packets to or
from the selected station(s) are shown, without headers, codes or
repeated frames. MBX overrides normal monitor functions and can show
one or both sides of a conversation. You can enter a single call
sign, or two call signs, separated by a comma:
cmd:MBX WXIAAA
or
cmd:MBX WXZBBB-4,WXÃ©DDD
NOTE: These stations must be connected to each other for this
feature to work. Use two call signs if you suspect that
your target station may be in a multiple connection.)
Use the MBX feature to:
o Read or record transmissions from any packet station, without any
extraneous material;
o Read or record transmissions from a PBBS or mailbox,an electronic
mail system or central file server while another station is down-
loading files or messages;
o Read or record traffic between two connected packet stations or
two electronic mail systems during mail forwarding operations.
The resulting information is free of all headers, frame identifier
codes, repeats and improperly sequenced lines. This eliminates most
editing usually needed to manually purge unwanted information.
NOTE: When using the MBX feature, your station is not part of the
protocol handshake between the originating and receiving
stations. If noise bursts or interfering packets collide
with the data being transferred between the two distant sta-
tions, you may miss one or more packets and lose one or more
lines of text.
Use the MBX feature when channel conditions are at their best and the
source station originating the transmissions is strong.
o An inbound connection deactivates the HEX command.
Clear MBX with '8,â€˜ '&,' â€˜N,â€™ 'NO,' 'NONE' or 'OFFâ€˜ as arguments.
5â€˜56 PK88-l38

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMARY
MCON â€˜n' Mnemonic: MC Default: O (zero)
Pagggeterst
'n' - 0 to 6 specifies various levels of monitor indications
Use MCON for selective monitoring of other traffic while connected to
a distant station.
MCON works in similar fashion to MONITOR, but affects your display
while in the connected state.
As the value of MOON settings is increased, additional functions are
included in the monitoring sequences.
Frames meant for you are displayed as though monitoring was OFF.
You will see only the data. When MCON is set to '6,â€™ frames meant for
you are displayed as any other monitored frame. The headers appear
together with the data.
The meanings of the parameter values are:
0 Monitoring while connected is disabled.
1 Only unnumbered (UI) frames resulting from an unconnected trans-
mission are displayed. Use this for an 'unproto,' roundtable
type contacts. Other mutually connected stations using the fre-
quency are also displayed. This setting also display beacons.
2 Numbered (I) frames are also displayed. I-frames are numbered in
order of generation and result from a connected transmission.
Use this to monitor connected conversations in progress.
3 Connect request (SABM or '0') frames and disconnect (DISC or â€˜D')
frames are also displayed with the headers.
A Unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) of connect- and disconnectâ€”state
frames are also displayed with either the characters 'UA' or 'DM'
and a header.
5 Receive Ready (RR), Receive Not Ready (RNR), Reject (RJ), Frame
Reject (FRMR) and (I)-Frames are also displayed.
6 Poll/Final bit and sequence numbers are also displayed.
Monitored frame protocols are shown by the type of brackets:
< > indicates AX.25 Level 2 Version 1 frames
[ ] indicates AX.2S Level 2 Version 2 command frames
( ) indicates AX.25 Level 2 Version 2 response frames
5-57 PK88-139

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HWCHECK Mnemonic: MDC Immediate Command
MDCHECK is an immediate command with which you can log on to your own
MailDrop just as a calling station would.
You can now LIST, READ, SEND or KILL messages. While you're â€˜logged
onâ€˜ to your own Mai1Drop with the MDCHECK comand, a connect request
from a calling station will cause the PK-88 to send the â€˜BUSYâ€™ (DH)
frame and DISCONNECT to the distant station.
If MAILDROP is OFF, the MDCHECK command will produce a â€˜?Hhat7' error
message. A calling station's connect request will he treated as an
ordinary packet connection. You cannot kill messages or clear the
MailDrop. You must use the MDCHECK command to â€˜log onâ€˜ to your Maile
Drop to use the MailDrop KILL command (see below).
A blinking STA LED shows that a message has been left for the PK-88
owner. Use of the MDCHECK command extinguishes the STA LED.
The following conditions are required to use the local logon feature:
o MAILDROP must be set ON.
o You cannot log on to your Mailbrop while a a calling station is
connected or a connect is in progress.
Type '5â€˜ (BYE) to â€˜log offâ€˜ or quit local control of your Mailbrop.
Your PK-88 is returned to MailDrop operation and made available to
calling stations. A connect request from a calling station will now
cause the PK~83 to respond normally and send the MailDrop prompt to
the distant station.
You still have full control of your PKâ€”88 while the MAILDROP is ON.
You can still initiate outbound connect requests to other packet
stations and carry on normal connected-mode contacts. You can make
multiple connections on any of the logical channels. However, you
should ggg enter Converse or Transparent mode on the same logical
channel as a calling station using the Mailbrop.
These â€˜standardâ€™ BBS commands available to both you and the calling
station are:
VlWl"'7<W
BYE Log off the Mailbrop
KILL Kill or delete messages
LIST List the message directory
READ Read a specific message
SEND Send a message
Only the first letter of the command is significant; for example, S,
SP, ST and SB are all treated equally as the SEND command.
See Chapter A for additional information on Mailbrop commands.
5-58 PKB8-1&0

PK 83 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMARY
HDIGI 0N|OFF Mnemonic: MD Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - I and UI frames having your call sign (MYCALL or MYALIAS) as
the next digipeater in the digipeater field are displayed,
whether you are connected or disconnected.
OFF > Normal monitoring as determined by the monitoring mode com-
mands
HDIGI permits you to display packet frames that your monitor would
normally not show when another station uses your station as a digi-
peater. MDIGI helps you to better understand the digipeating paths
that may involve your station, even when you've been unaware of what's
happening on the channel.
Use MDIGI to see why your transmitter is being keyed when you're not
actively involved in a communication session, or when your system is
more active than you would expect
When MDIGI is OFF you will see those frames that include your station
as one of the digipeaters only if your monitor modes have been set
this way. If your monitor modes have not been set so you can see
these frames, set MDICI ON to display them.
HDHON 0N]OFF Mnemonic: MDM Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - Monitor a calling station's activity on your MailDrop
OFF - Normal monitoring as determined by the monitoring mode com~
mands
Set MDMON to ON to monitor your Mailbrop. The minimum command string
is MDH. Set MDMON OFF to cancel MailDrop monitoring. The default
condition is ON.
The MDMON command permits you to monitor a calling station's activity
on your Mailbrop showing you both sides of the Mailbrop QSO. Packet
headers are not shown while a caller is connected to your MailDrop.
When a caller is not connected to your Mailbrop, channel activity is
monitored in normal fashion according to the setting of the MONITOR
parameter.
5-59 PK88-lbl

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
MDPROMYT text Mnemonic: MDP Default: (see text)
Parameters:
ON - Monitor a calling station's activity on your Mailbtop
OFF - Normal monitoring as determined by the monitoring mode com-
mands
MDPROMPT (text) is the command line sent to a calling station by your
Mai1Drop, and is similar to the command prompts sent to a calling
station by a full-service packet BBS. This prompt has no connection
with BTEXT and is sent only to a loggedÂ»on caller.
You can install any â€˜personalizedâ€™ text with a maximum length of 80
bytes. The minimum command string is MDP. The default prompt is:
"Enter message, â€œZ (CTRL~Z) to end"
MEMORY 'n' Mnemonic: ME Default: none
Parameters:
n - a hexadecimal address used with the ADDRESS and I/0 commands
to access the PK-88's memory and I/O locations, or to read
values stored at a specified address.
The MEMORY command permits access to memory and 1/O locations.
To use the Memory command:
o Set the memory address into the ADDRESS command.
o Use the MEMORY command without arguments to read memory locations
one after another.
0 Use MEMORY with one argument 0-$FF to write to memory locations.
After each MEMORY command, the PK-88 adds l to the value of the
ADDRESS.
PK-88 RAM locations are $8000-$FFFF. ROM begins at $0000.
The MEMORY command increments the ADDRESS counter by l each time
MEMORY is typed.
5-60 PK88-142

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HFILTER n1[ ,n2[ ,n3[ ,n/e] I] Hnemonic: MFI Default: $80
ESKHIIIGCEISI
â€˜n' - 0 to $80 (0 to 128 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
Up to four characters may be specified.
Use HFILTER to select characters to be â€˜filtered,â€™ or excluded from
monitored packets. Parameters 'n1,' 'n2,' etc., are the ASCII codes
for the characters you want to filter. You can enter up to four char~
acters in either hex or decimal.
The default value $80 filters all received control characters except
<C'lâ€˜Rl.-J>, (SOA), the line feed, <CTRL-M>, ($0D).the carriage return,
and <CTRL-I>, ($09), the HORIZONTAL TAB.
Use MFILTER selectively to remove specific characters from the data
stream to the terminal or computer. Here are typical applications.
o To prevent a <CTRLâ€˜L> character from clearing your screen, set
HFILTER 12.
0 To eliminate <CTRL-Z> characters, which some computers interpret
as end-of-file markers and some terminals interpret as a Clear
Screen command, set MFILTER 26.
0 To eliminate <CTRL-C> characters, which beep your computer or
terminal, set MFILTER 7.
5-61 PK88-1&3

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
MFROH al1,n0ne,yes/no calll[,call2..] Mnemonic: MF Default: all
Parameters:
call - all, none, YES_list, NO_list.
list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas.
MFROM uses arguments to determine how the PK-88 monitors the packet
channels and displays information - which stationsâ€™ packets will be
displayed and which stationsâ€˜ packets will be masked or hidden. MFROM
is set to 'allâ€˜ when you start the PK~88 for the first time.
Type MFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES_list/NO_list status of station
call signs whose packets will or will not be displayed. You can use
the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmd:mfrom
MFROM all
cmdzmf
Ml-â€˜ROM yes wx1AAA,wx2sBs,m<3ccc,w><1mno
To stop any packets from being displayed, type MFROM NONE.
To display packets from one or more specific stations type MFROM (YES
followed by a list of calls signs). Packets will Q; displayed only
from stations whose call signs are listed after YES.
To hide or mask packets from one or more specific stations, type MFROM
(NO followed by a list of call signs). Packets from stations whose
call signs are listed after N0 will Q9; be displayed.
You can include optional SSIDs or extensions specified as '-n' after
the call sign.
If MFROM is set to â€˜no WXlAAA' or â€˜yes WXlAAA,' any combination like
WXIAAA, UXIAAA-l,...WXlAAA-15 will be matched and processed. If MFROM
is set to â€˜yes WXIAAA-1' or â€˜no WXlAAA-l,' then ggly WXlAAA-l will
match and be processed.
When MFROM and MTO contain different types of arguments, to avoid any
possible conflict, the arguments take the following priority:
ownÂ»-1
ALL
N0 list
YES list
. NONE
Clear MFROM with '%,â€˜ '&,â€˜ or â€˜OFFâ€˜ as arggments.
5-62 PK88-lhh

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
HHEARD Hnemonic: MR Imediate Command
MMEARD is an immediate command that displays a list of stations heard
since the last time the HHEARD buffer was cleared.
Use a percent sign (S), an ampersand (&), â€˜N,â€™ 'N0,"NONE,' or â€˜OFFâ€™
after the command word to clear the MHEARD buffer.
The maximum number of heard stations that can be logged is 18. If
more stations are heard, earlier entries are discarded.
n Stations that are heard directly are marked with a * in the heard
10 .
o Stgtions that have been repeated by a digipeater are not marked.
o If you clear the list of stations heard at the beginning of a
session, you can use this comand to keep track of the stations
that are active during that period.
0 Logging of stations heard is disabled when PASSALL is ON.
When DAYTIME has been used to set the date and time, entries in the
heard log are time stamped. When DAYSTAMP is ON, the date is shown
before the time. Here is an example of the MHEARD function with the
clock set:
DAYSTAMP QN QAYSTAMP OFF
cmd:mh
05-Jul-86
OS-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
OS-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
05-Jul-86
O5-Jul-86
cmd:
UAIFJU
us1xu*
WIAW-5
WZHPM-A*
WIAU-A
w2JuP-9
u3Eou*
W2JUP-4*
KZAAA
wzinq
WASNA-1
WAZPBB
KAZAXM
WBZANH
KAINYC
WBZEUL
Kaswe
KASBB-1*
5-63 FK88-1&5
cmd:mh
21:b2:
21:42:
21:32:
21:27:
21:26:41
21:26:
21:21:
21:21:
21:05:
14:45:
lh:45:
14:b5:A7
1b:28:
14:23:
lb:23:
13:55:
13:50:
cmd:
07
20:56:A0
WAIFJH
welxu*
w1Aw-5
wznrn-a*
WIAW-h
WZJUP-9
w3Eou*
wzaur-4*
KZAAA
wnnq
WAZSNA-1
WAZPBB
KAZAXM
WBZANH
KAINYC
WBZEUL
Kaawt
KA3BB-1*

P1088 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HONITOR 'n' Mnemonic: M Default: 4
Parameters:
â€˜n' - 0 to 6 specifies various levels of monitor indications
As the value of MONITOR settings is increased, additional functions
are included in the monitoring sequences.
The meanings of the parameter values are:
O All packet monitoring functions are disabled.
1 Only unnumbered (U1) frames resulting from an unconnected trans-
mission are displayed. Use this for an 'unproto,' roundtable
type contact. Other mutually connected stations using the fre-
quency are not displayed. This setting also displays beacons.
2 Numbered (I) frames are also displayed. I-frames are numbered in
order of generation and result from a connected transmission.
Use this to monitor connected conversations in progress.
3 Connect request (SABH or 'C') frames and disconnect (DISC or 'D')
frames are also displayed with the headers.
A Unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) of connect- and disconnect-state
frames are also displayed with either the characters 'UA' or 'DMâ€˜
and a header.
S Receive Ready (RR), Receive Not Ready (RNR), Reject (RJ), Frame
Reject (FRMR) and (I)-Frames are also displayed.
6 Poll/Final bit and sequence numbers are also displayed.
Monitored frame protocols are shown by the type of brackets:
< > indicates AX.25 Level 2 Version l frames
[ ] indicates AX.25 Level 2 Version 2 command frames
( ) indicates AX.25 Level 2 Version 2 response frames
5-64 PK88-1&6

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
MONITOR ON|OFF Mnemonic: M Default: ON (6)
Parameters:
ON - Equivalent to MONITOR k
OFF ~ Equivalent to MONITOR 0
In host computer applications that use a parameter value switching
routine rather than numeric values. the MONITOR command can be used
with ON and OFF instead of numbers 0 through 6.
This alternate MONITOR command is appropriate in certain electronic
mail and bulletin board systems.
When MONITOR is set to ON, the response message will indicate the
numeric value 4. When MONITOR is set to OFF, the response message
will indicate the numeric value 0.
cmdzmon off cmd:mon on
MONITOR was Q (UA DM C D I Ul) MONITOR was O (none)
MONITOR now O (none) MONITOR now 4 (UA DM C D I UI)
MPROTO ONIOFF Mnemonic: MP Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - Monitor all I-frames regardless of PID byte
OFF - Monitor only I-frames with PID byte F0
Use the MPROTO command to restrict monitoring and screen display when
sharing radio channels with systems or packet nodes using higher~level
protocols.
Certain Level 3 packet node switching systems send frames containing
control characters with a Protocol Identifier Byte (PID) of $CF or
other values. Some types of packet switches send binary information
which you may wish to suppress from your screen display.
Set MPROT0 to OFF; such Level 3 frames will not be displayed.
5-65 PK88-147

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HRPT ON|OFF Mnemonic: HR Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - Show digipeaters in the header; stations heard directly are
marked with asterisk.
OFF - Show packets only from originating and destination stations.
MRPT affects the way monitored packets are displayed. When MRPT is
OFF, only packets from the originating station and the destination are
displayed as they appear with MONITOR set to 6.
UX1AAA*>NX2BBB <I;0,3>:
When MRPT is ON, the call signs of all stations in the entire digipeat
path are displayed. The call sign of the stations heard directly are
flagged with an asterisk (*):
WX1AAA*>WX3CCC>WXhDDD>WX2BBB <I;O,3>:
HSTAHP ON]OFF Mnemonic: MS Default: OFF
gagameters:
ON ~ Monitored frames ARE time stamped.
OFF ~ Monitored frames ARE NOT time stamped.
The HSTAMP command activates or disables time stamping of monitored
packets. when the PK-88's internal software clock is set, date and
time information is available for automatic logging of packet activity
or other applications.
When MSTAMP is OFF, the packet header display looks like this:
UX1AAA*>WX2BBB>WX3CCC <I;2,2>:
When MSTAMP is ON and DAYSTAMP is OFF, the display looks like this:
22:51:33 WXlAAA*>WX2BBB>WX3CCC <I;l,7>:
When both MSTAMP and DAYSTAMP are ON, the display looks like this:
lO-Jul-86 22:54:25 UXlAAA*>WX2BBB>WX3CCC <I;Z,Z>:
Set the date and time with the DAYTIME command. Setting MSTAMP ON
increases the length of the address display. Set HEADERLN ON to dis-
play this information on a separate line.
S-66 PK88-148

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
HTO all,none,yes/no calll[,call2..] Mnemonic: MT Default: none
Parameters:
call - all, none, YES_list, N0_list.
list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas.
MTO uses arguments to determine how the PK-88 monitors packet channels
and displays information - which stationsâ€™ packets will be displayed
and which stationsâ€˜ packets will be masked or hidden. MTO is set to
'none' when you start the PKâ€”88 for the first time.
Type MTO to display the ALL/NONE/YES list/N0 list status of call signs
of stations to which addressed packets will or will not be displayed.
You can use the abbreviated command form or mnemonic:
cmd:mto
MTO all
cmd:mt
MTO yes WXIAAA,WX2BBB,WX3CCC,WXbDDD
To stop packets addressed to all stations from being displayed, type
MTO ALL.
To display only packets addressed T0 one or more specific stations,
type MTO (YES followed by a list of calls signs). Packets will he
displayed only if addressed pg stations whose call signs are listed
after YES.
To hide or mask packets addressed gg one or more specific stations,
type HTO (N0 followed by a list of call signs). Packets addressed gg
stations whose call signs are listed after N0 will 39; be dlgglayed.
You can include optional SSlDs or extensions specified as '-n' after
the call sign. If MTO is set to â€˜no WXIAAA or 'yes WXlAAA,' any com-
bination WXIAAA, WXIAAA-l,...WXlAAA-l5 will be matched and processed.
If MTO is set to â€˜yes WXIAAA-lâ€™ or â€˜no WXIAAA-1,â€˜ then onl1 NXlAAA-l
will match and be processed.
when MFRDM and MTO contain different types of arguments, to avoid any
possible conflict, the arguments take the following priority:
e w N w
ALL
NO list
YES list
NONE
Clear MTO with '%,' â€˜&,' or â€˜0FF' as arguments.
5-67 PK88-l49

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COHAND SUMMARY
HYALIAS call[-n] Mnemonic: HYA Default: empty
Parametetgl
call Alternate identity of the PK-88.
'n' alphanumeric optional substation ID (SSID) or extension.
HYALIAS specifies an alternate call sign (in addition to the call sign
specified in MYCALL) for use as a digipeater only.
MYALIAS permits both normal HID identification and an alias alternate,
repeater-only â€˜call signl
Wide-coverage digipeater operators in some areas change their call
sign to a shorter and (usually) easier to remember identifier.
Identifiers used include International Civil Aviation Organization
(ICAO) airport IDs, sometimes combined with telephone area codes.
5-68 PKSB-150

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
MYCALL call[-'n'] Mnemonic: MY Default: PK88
Zarametegst
call - Your call sign.
'n' - alphanumerics indicating an optional substation ID
(SSID) or extension.
NOTE: The PK-88 will Q9; kg! ygg; tgggggjgggg until you install
your call sign in place of 'PK8B.'
Use the MYCALL command to load your call sign into the PK-88's RAM.
Your call sign is inserted automatically in the FROM address field for
all packets originated by the PK-B8. MYCALL is also used for iden-
tification packets (see HID and ID).
The PK-88 accepts connect request frames with your MYCALL in the TO
field and repeats frames with this call sign in the digipeat field.
The 'PK88â€™ default call sign is present in the PK-88's RAM when the
system is manufactured. This â€˜artificial callâ€˜ must he changed for
proper operation of the packet protocols.
Two or more stations cannot use the same call sign (including SSID or
extension) on the air at the same time.
0 Use the SSID or extension to distinguish two stations with the
same call.
0 The SSID or extension will be zero (0) unless explicitly set to
another value.
Although there is no standardization of SSIDs at present, most packet
radio operators use SSID 0 (zero) for manual or local keyboard opera-
tion of their main station, and an SSID of (-1) or (-2) for a second-
ary station or dedicated digipeater under their responsibility.
Local area networks operated or maintained by a given organization may
use the same call sign for several stations in their network, each
node or unit being identified with a different SSID or extension. As
packet networks grow and become more complex with multi-port switches,
gateway systems and frequency translation between bands, SSIDs or ex-
tensions become especially significant. For example look at the hypo-
thetical case:
WXlAAA>WX2BBB-6>WX2BBB<7>WX5EEE-l>WX5BBE<4
lh5.0l 1bS.Ol 22l.ll 221.11 1h5.0l
In this example, HXIAAA is linked to WX5EEEâ€”b via a combination of
digipeaters and Level 3 switched, each having a distinctive SSID.
5-69 PKB8-151

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUHARY
NEVHODE 0N|0FF Mnemonic: NE Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 automatically returns to the Command Mode at dis-
connect .
OFF - The PK-88 does not return to Comand Mode at disconnect.
NENMODE determines how the PK-88 behaves when the link is broken.
The PK-88 always switches to a data transfer mode at the time of con-
nection, unless NOMODE is ON.
Set NEWMODE for the type of operation most suitable to your needs.
If NEWMODE is OFF and the link is disconnected, the PK-88 remains in
Converse or Transparent Mode unless you have forced it to return to
Command Mode.
when NEWMODE is ON and the link is disconnected, or if the connect
attempt fails, the PK-68 returns to Command Mode.
Certain electronic mail, packet bulletin board or other host computer
programs may require NENMODE to be set OFF. Please consult the soft-
ware provider for additional information in this regard.
NOHODE 0N[OFF Mnemonic: NO Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK~8B switch modes (Command, Converse, Transparent) only
upon explicit command. NEWMODE function is ignored.
OFF - The PK-88 changes modes according to NEWMODE.
When NOMODE is ON, the PK-88 never switches from Converse or Trans>
parent Mode to Command Mode (or vice versa) by itself. Only specific
commands (CONVERSE, K, TRANS, or <CTRL~C>) typed by you can change the
operating mode. NOMODE ON supersedes NEWMODE.
When NOMODE is OFF, the PK-88 switches modes automatically according
to the way NEWMODE is set.
Certain electronic mail, packet bulletin board or other host computer
programs may require NOMODE to be set ON. Please consult the software
provider for additional information in this regard.
5-70 PKBB-152

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
NUCR ONIOFF Mnemonic: NU Default: OFF
Parameters :
ON ~ <NULl.> characters ARE sent to the terminal following <CR>
characters.
OFF - <N'ULL> characters ARE NOT sent to the terminal following
<CR> characters.
Some of the older electromechanical terminals (Teletypetm machines)
and printer terminals require some extra time for the printing head to
do a line feed and return to the left margin. NUCR ON solves this
problem by making the PK-88 send <NULl> characters (ASCII code $00) to
your computer or terminal. This introduces any necessary delay after
any <CR> sent to the terminal.
The NULLS command sets the number of individual <NULL> characters that
are to be sent when NUCR is ON.
o Set NUCR ON if your terminal or printer misses one or more char-
acters after responding to a <CR>. If this is the case, you will
sometimes see overtyped lines.
NULF ON|OFF Mnemonic: NUL Default: OFF
Rarame Ce rs Z
ON - <NUl.L> characters are sent to the terminal following <LF>
characters.
OFF < <NULL> characters are not sent to the terminal following
<LI-> characters.
Some of the older electromechanical terminals (Teletypetm machines)
and printer terminals require some extra time for the printing head to
do a line feed and return to the left margin. NULF ON solves this
problem my making the PK~88 send <NUl.L> characters (ASCII code $00) to
your computer or terminal. This introduces any necessary delay after
any <LE> sent to the terminal.
The NULLS command sets the number of individual <N'ULl.> characters that
are to be sent when NULI-â€˜ is ON.
Set NULF ON if your terminal or printer misses one or more characters
at the beginning of a new line after responding to a <LI">.
5-7l PK88-153

PK-88 OP
ERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
NULLS 'n' Mnemonic: NULL Default: 0 (zero)
Parameters:
'n' ~ 0 to 30 specifies the number of <NULL> characters to be sent
to your computer or terminal after <CR> or <LD when NUCR or
NULF are set ON.
NULLS specifies the number of <N'ULL> characters (ASCII code $00) to be
sent to the terminal after a <CR> or <LF> is sent.
0 NUCR and/or NULF must be set to indicate whether nulls are to be
sent after <CR>, <LI-â€˜> or both.
Devices requiring nulls after <CR> are typically hard-copy devices
requiring time for carriage movement. This applies to most of the
older electromechanical teleprinters and computer printers.
Devices requiring nulls after <LF> are usually slow-scrolling CRTs.
The null characters are sent from the PK-B8 to your computer only in
Converse and Command Modes.
S-72 PK88-1514

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
PACLEN 'nâ€˜ Mnemonic: PAGL Default: 128
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to 255 specifies the maximum length of the data portion of
a packet.
0 - Zero is equivalent to 256.
PACLEN sets the maximum number of user data bytes to be carried in
each packet's â€˜information field.â€˜ â€˜User dataâ€˜ means the characters
you actually type at your keyboard (or send from a stored file).
The PK-88 automatically transmits a packet when the number of char-
acters you type (or send from disk) for a packet equals 'n.' This
value is used in both Converse and Transparent Modes.
Most keyboard-to-keyboard operators use the default value of 128 bytes
for routine VHF/UHF packet services.
Experiment with different values for MAXFRAME and PACLEN to find the
combination best suited to your operating conditions - especially if
you are transferring files.
0 The lower the value of PACLEN, the greater the probability of
getting packets though the link without â€˜hitsâ€™ or retries.
o Increase PACLEN to 256 byes (set 0) if transferring files to a
nearby station over a high quality path.
o Reduce PACLEN to 64, or even 32 when working 'difficult' HF radio
paths.
o If the radio link is good, an optimal relationship will exist
between the parameters set by these commands. Set PACLEN so that
the maximum number of characters outstanding doesn't exceed the
receive buffer space of the TNC receiving the data.
It is not necessary that two TNCs be set to the same PACLEN value to
exchange data; however, some TNCs may not be compatible when frames
contain more than 128 data characters.
NOTE: The FRACK counter begins counting from the first {lag gÂ§
each frame. If MAXFRAME is set to 7 and PACLEN is set to
maximum (0), FRACK should be lengthened to prevent the dis-
tant station's ACK from colliding with your possibly-prema<
ture retry.
5-73 PK88-l55

PKÂ»88 OPERATING MANUAL COHMAND SUMMARY
PACTIHE EVERY|AFTER 'n' Mnemonic: PACT Default: AFTER 10
Parameters:
vâ€œ. _
EVERY -
AFTER ~
O to 250 specifies 100-millisecond intervals.
Packet timeout occurs every 'n' times 100 milliseconds.
Packet timeout occurs when 'n' time 100 milliseconds
elapse without input from the computer or terminal.
A PACTIME parameter is always
in Converse Mode if CPACTIME is ON.
also used
used in Transparent Mode. PACTIHE is
o When EVERY is specified, the characters you type or send from
disk
are packaged and queued for transmission every 'n' times 100
millisec
onds.
o When AFTER is specified, the characters you type or send from
disk are packaged when input from the terminal stops for 'n'
times 100 milliseconds.
A zero-length packet will never be produced. The timer is not started
until the first character or byte is entered.
A value of 0 (zero) for 'n' is allowed; zero means packets are sent
with no wait time.
PARITY 'n' Mnemonic: PAR Default: 3 (even)
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to 3 selects a parity option from the table below.
PARITY sets the PK-88's data parity for terminal or computer data
transfer according to the following table:
O - no parity
1 - odd parity
2 - no parity
3 - even parity
The parity bit, if present, is stripped automatically on input, and is
not checked in Command and Converse Modes.
In Transparent Mode all eight bits (including parity) are transmitted
in packets.
when â€˜no parityâ€˜ is sec and AWLEN is 7, the eighth bit is
set to O (zero).
5-70 PK88-156

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
PASS 'n' Hnemonic: PAS Default: $16 <CTRL-V>
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to $7? (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
PASS selects the ASCII character used for the 'passâ€˜ input editing
command.
The parameter 'n' is the numeric ASCII code for the character you'll
use to signal that the character immediately following it is to be
included in a packet or text string.
o You can enter the code in either hex or decimal.
Use the PASS character (default <CTRL~V>) to send characters that
usually have special functions.
A common use for the pass character is to allow <CR> to be included in
the BTEXT and CTEXT messages so that the transmitted information ap-
pears on several short lines rather than a single longer line.
Use the PASS character to insert <CRs> at the end of a short line:
cmd:BT Notice:<CTRLÂ»V><CTRL-M>
Meeting at the Firehouse tonight <CTRL-V><CTRL-M>
at 8:00 PM. All welcome! <CR>
The distant station's monitor shows:
Notice:
Meeting at the Firehouse tonight
at 8:00 PM. All welcomel.
Without the PASS character, the message would probably look like this:
Notice: Meeting at the Firehouse tonight at 8:00 PM. All welcome!
In like manner, you can include <CR> in text when you are in Converse
Mode, to send multi-line packets. (The default send>packet character
is <CR>.)
5-75 PK88-157

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
PASSALL 0N|0FF Mnemonic: PASSA Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 will accept packets with invalid CRCs.
OFF - The PK-88 will only accept packets with valid CRCS4
PASSALL permits the PK-88 to display packets received with invalid CRC
fields; the error-detecting mechanism is turned off.
Packets are accepted for display despite CRC errors if they consist of
an even multiple of eight bits and are up to 330 bytes. The PK-88
attempts to decode the address field and displays the call sign(s) in
the standard monitor format, followed by the text of the packet.
PASSALL is normally turned off; therefore, the protocol ensures that
received packet data is error-free by rejecting packets with invalid
CRC fields.
PASSALL (sometimes called â€˜Garbage Modeâ€™) may be useful for testing a
marginal RF link or during operation under other unusual conditions or
circumstances.
when you set PASSALL ON while monitoring a moderately noisy channel,
'packets' are displayed periodically because there is no basis for
distinguishing between actual packets and random noise.
o when PASSALL is ON, logging of stations heard (for display by
MHEARD) is disabled; the call signs detected may be incorrect.
5-76 PK88-158

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMAND SUMMARY
YERSIST â€˜n' Hnemonic: PE Default: 63
Parameters:
â€˜n' - 0 to 255 specifies the threshold value for a random-number
attempt to transmit.
'0' - Signifies a l/256th chance of transmitting every SLOTTIME.
'255'- Signifies â€˜transmit right away without delayâ€˜.
The PERSIST parameter works with PPERSIST and SLOTTIME to achieve true
p-persistent CSMA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access) in KISS TNC mode and
AX.Z5 operation. However, little improvement will be obtained in
AX.25 operation unless other stations on the channel are also using
PERSIST and SLOTTIME.
When the host (your computer) has queued data for transmission, the
PK-88 monitors the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal from its internal
modem. The PK-88 waits indefinitely for DCD to go inactive.
When the channel is clear, the PK-B8 generates a random number between
0 and 255. If this number is less-than or equal to â€˜Pâ€™, the PK-88
keys the PTT line, waits .01 * TXDELAY seconds, and then transmits all
frames in its queue. The PK-88 then un-keys the PTT line and returns
to the idle state.
If the randomly-generated number is greater than â€˜Pâ€™, the PK-88 waits
.01 * SLDTTIME seconds and repeats the procedure. If the DCD signal
has gone active in the meantime, the PK-88 again waits for DCD to
clear before continuing.
The PK-88 waits an exponentially-distributed random interval after
sensing that the channel is clear before trying to transmit. With
proper â€˜tuningâ€™ of the PERSIST and SLDTTIME parameters, several sta-
tions sending traffic are much less likely to collide with each other
when they simultaneously see that the channel is clear.
The default value of 63 assumes that there are four stations on your
channel. Modify this value according to your local conditions.
NOTE: P-Z55 means â€˜always transmit as soon as possible, regardless
of the random numberâ€˜.
See Chapter 6 for additional information on p-persistent operation.
5-77 PK88-159

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
PPERSIST ON|OFF Mnemonic: PP Default: ON
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 uses PERSIST and SLOTTIME parameters in executing
p-persistent CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access).
OFF - The PK-88 uses DWAIT for AX.25-type l-persistent CSMA.
Use the PPERSIST command to switch the PK-88 from l-persistent CSMA
operation based on the DWAIT value to p-persistent CSMA operation.
This is required when using host computer applications based on the
TCP/IP protocols and in certain electronic mail and bulletin board
programs.
When PPERSIST is set ON, the PK~8B uses the PERSIST and SLOTTIME par-
ameters for p-persistent CSMA instead of the normal AX.25 protocol
DWAIT procedure to achieve CSMA operation.
PPERSIST is used in KISS TNC and, under certain specific conditions,
in AX.25 operation.
See PERSIST and SLOTTIME in this chapter.
See Chapter 6 for additional information on p-persistent operation.
RAWHDLC ON|OFF Mnemonic: RAW Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 functions as a direct or raw HDLC controller.
OFF - The PK-88 functions as a normal AX.25 controller.
Some host computer applications do not use AX.25 protocols. In such
cases, the PK-88 can be operated as a raw HDLC controller. allowing
the host to provide all protocol commands and responses. Applications
may include some types of electronic mail systems, bulletin board pro-
grams and computers operating with TCP/IP and other communication pro-
tocols.
Use the RAWHDLC command to disable AX.25 protocols and permit the host
system direct access to the PK-88's HDLC integrated circuit.
RAWHDLS must be set ON when using KISS TNC protocols with TCP/IP.
5-78 PK88-160

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
REDISPLA 'nâ€˜ Mnemonic: RED Default: $12 <CTRL>R>
Parameters:
'nâ€˜ - 0 to $7F (0 to 1.27 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
REDISPLA changes the redisplay-line input editing character.
Parameter 'nâ€˜ is the numeric ASCII code for the character to use when
you want to re-display the current input line. You can enter the code
in either hexadecimal or decimal numbers.
Type the REDISPLA character to redisplay a line you've just typed.
The following things happen:
0 Type-in flow control is temporarily turned off (if it had been
active). Any incoming packets that are pending are displayed.
o A <BACKSlASH> is appended to the line you've just typed and the
line is shown below it. Only the final form of the line is shown
if you have deleted or or changed any characters.
You can now continue typing where you left off.
Use the REDISPLA command to see a â€˜cleanâ€™ copy of your input if you
are using a printing terminal and you have deleted characters. Use
the REDISPLA command if a packet is received while you're typing a
message in Converse Mode. You can see the incoming message before you
send your packet without canceling your input.
If BKONDEL is set OFF, deletions are designated with <BACKSLASH> char-
acters, rather than by trying to correct the input line display. The
redisplayed line is the corrected text.
RELINK ON|OI-â€˜F Mnemonic: REL Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - In AX.25 Versions l and 2, the PK-88 will automatically try
to reconnect the distant station after the link has timed
out on retries.
OFF - The PK-88 will not attempt to re-establish the failed link.
When RELINK is ON, the PK-88 attempts to reconnect by sending SABH
frames (Connect Requests) after retrying out. When RELINK is OFF, the
PK-88 forces a disconnect by sending a DISC frame (Disconnect Command)
after retrying out.
Set RELINK to OFF when using the PK-88 with host computer applica-
tions, computer-based message systems and electronic mail programs.
Please refer to the related CHECK command.
S - 79 PK88 - 161

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
RESET Mnemonic: RESET Immediate Command
RESET is an immediate command that resets all parameters to default
settings and reinitializes the PK-88.
CAQIIQE:
All personalized parameters and monitor lists are lost!
To reinitialize the PK-B8 using the parameter values in bbRAH, turn
the PK-88 OFF then ON, or use the RESTART command.
RESPTIHE 'n' Mnemonic: RES Default: 5
Parameters:
'n' ~ 0 to 250 specifies 100-millisecond intervals.
RESPTIME adds a minimum delay before the PK-88 sends acknowledgment
packets. This delay may run concurrently with the default wait time
set by DWAIT and any random wait in effect.
Use RESPTIME delay to increase throughput during operations such as
file transfer when the sending TNC usually sends the maximum number of
full-length packets.
Occasionally, the sending TNC may not have a packet ready in time to
prevent transmission from being stopped temporarily, with the result
that the acknowledgment of earlier packets collides with the final
packet of the series.
Set RESPTIHE to 10 to avoid these collisions.
RESTART Hnemonic: RESTART Immediate Command
RESTART is an immediate command that reinitializes the PK-88 using the
defaults stored in the PK-8B's bbRAM. Your personalized parameter
settings are retained unchanged.
The effect of the RESTART command is the same as turning the P1088
OFF, then ON again. RI-ZSTART can be used remotely over the radio link
to restart a PK-88 when required.
RESTART does not reset the parameter values in bbRAM. See the RESET
command.
5-80 PK88-162

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COHAND SUMARY
RETRY â€˜nâ€˜ Hnemonic: RE Default: 10
Parameters:
â€˜nâ€˜ - 0 to l5 specifies the maximum number of packet retries.
The AX.25 protocol uses retries - retransmission of frames that have
not been acknowledged. Frames are retransmitted â€˜n' times before the
link is disconnected. A value of 0 for â€˜nâ€˜ specifies an infinite num-
ber of retries.
The FRACK command sets the time between retries. See the FRACK com-
mand.
If the number of designated retries is exceeded, the PK-88 enters
either the â€˜connect in progressâ€˜ or â€˜disconnectedâ€™ state depending on
the setting of RELINK.
If you are not in Transparent Mode, the following message is shown:
*** Retry count exceeded
SENDPAC 'n' Mnemonic: SE Default: $OD <CTRL-M
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to 57F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
The SENDPAC command selects the character used to cause a packet to be
sent while in Converse Mode. The parameter 'n' is the numeric ASCII
code for the character that packetizes the characters you type and
queues them for transmission. You can enter the code in either hexa-
decimal or decimal numbers.
The default SENDPAC value SOD is fine for ordinary conversation with
CR ON. This sends packets at natural intervals with <CRs> included in
the packet.
When setting CPACTIME ON, set SENDPAC to some value not ordinarily
used (for example <CTRL-A>), with CR OFF). This causes packets to be
sent without extra <CR> characters included in the text.
The SENDPAC character is not necessarily treated as a <CR> unless it
really ig a carriage return.
5-Bl PK8B-163

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
SLDTTIHE 'n' Hnemonic: SL Default: 10 (100 ms)
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to 250 specifies the time in ten-millisecond intervals
during which the PK-88 waits between generating random num-
bers to see if it can transmit.
The SLOTTIME parameter works with the PPERSIST and PERSIST parameters
to achieve true p-persistent CSMA (Carrier~Sense Multiple Access) in
KISS TNC mode and in normal AX.25 operation. However, no real
advantage will be obtained in AX.25 operation unless the other
stations on the channel are alS0 using PERSIST and SLDTTIHE.
See Chapter 6 for further discussion of SLOTTIME, PERSIST and KISS TNC
protocols.
SQUELCH ON|0I-â€˜F Mnemonic: SQ Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - The PK-88 responds to positive-going squelch voltage.
OFF - The PK-88 responds to negative-going squelch voltage.
Normally, to decide if the channel is clear so that it can transmit
the PK~B8 uses its CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access) circuit by
sensing audio mark and space tones from your packet receiver.
If there are signals other than packet on the channel you're using
(such as voice operation), it's possible that the PK-88 might not be
quite as polite as it is normally and transmit on top of the other
signals.
The PK-88 can use true RFÂ»carrier CSMA by monitoring the squelch line
voltage from your radio. This line can be easily connected in many
radios to the â€˜busyâ€™ light or indicator on the radio's front panel, or
to other circuit locations that indicate the presence or absence of
carrier or received signals. Because your carrier-sensing signal can
be active-low or active-high (depending on the individual radio manu-
facturer's design), you can set the PK-88 to sense either positive or
negative squelch voltages.
5-82 PK88-164

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
START 'n' Hnemonic: STA Default: $11 <CTRL-Q>
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
Use the START command to choose the User Start character you want to
use to restart output from the PK-88 to the terminal after it has
been halted by typing the User Stop character.
o The User Stop character is set by the STOP command.
o You can enter the value in either hex or decimal.
If the User Start and User Stop characters are set to $00 Q XFIDYJ is
set to OFF, software flow control to the PK-88 is disabled; the PK-88
will only respond to hardware flow control (CTS/RTS).
If the same character is used for both the User Start and User Stop
characters, the PK-88 alternately starts and stops transmission on
receipt of the character ('toggles').
STOP 'n' Hnemonic: STD Default: $13 <CTRL~S>
Parameters:
'nâ€˜ - O to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
Use the STOP command to select the User Stop character you want to use
to stop output from the PK-88 to the terminal. Type this character
to halt the PK-88's output to your monitor so that you can read the
received text before it scrolls off your screen display.
Output is restarted with the User Start character.
0 The User Start character is set by the START command.
o You can enter the value in either hex or decimal.
If the User Start and User Stop characters are set to $00 or XFLOU is
set to O1-â€˜F, software flow control to the PK-88 is disabled; the PK-88
will only respond to hardware flow control (CTS/RTS).
If the same character is used for both the User Start and User Stop
characters, the PK-88 alternately starts and stops transmission upon
receipt of the character ('toggles').
5-83 PK88-165

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
TBAUD â€™n' Mnemonic: TB Default: 1200 bauds
Parameters:
'n' - Specifies the serial I/0 port (terminal) data rate in bauds.
TBAUD displays the baud rate set by the autobaud routine when you
first apply power to the PK-88, or after typing â€˜RI-JSET.'
Use TBAUD to set terminal rates not covered by the autobaud routine,
such as 75, ll0 and 600 and 19,200 bauds. The new rate will become
active at the next powerâ€”on or RESTART. A warning message reminds you
of this.
If you plan to change terminals, but want to retain all the RAH para<
meter values, set TBAUD, AWLEN and PARITY to the new terminalâ€™s char-
acteristics while g are still connected Q the old terminal. Next,
turn off the PK-88, change the terminal and turn the PK-88 on again.
TCLEAR Mnemonic: TC Immediate Command
The TCLEAR con\mand clears the PK-88's transmit buffer and cancels fur~
ther transmission of data except for a few remaining packets.
o You must be in the Command Mode to use TCLEAR.
o Use the <CTRL-C> (default) command to return to Command Mode.
o Type â€˜TCâ€™ to clear the transmit buffer.
TIME Mnemonic: TI Default: $14 <CTRL-T>
Eagameterst
â€™n' ~ 0 to $75â€˜ (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
The TIME command specifies a control character in the text you type
into the transmit buffer or into a text file stored on disk.
o Type <CTRL-T> to embed the TIME command in your text or file.
At transmit time, the PK-88 reads the embedded control code (default
<CTRL~'lâ€˜>), reads the time of day from the PK-88's internal clock and
then sends the time to the radio in the data transmission code in use
at that time.
When DAYSTAMP is set ON, the date is transmitted with the time.
EQQE: The TIME command cannot be embedded in CTEXT OR BTEXT.
5-810 PK88-166

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
TONE Mnemonic: T0 Default: 3 (BELL 202)
Zagamgteggi
â€˜n' - O to 3 specifies an ASCII transmit and receive modem tones.
The TONE command sets the Am7910 Modem chipâ€˜s send and receive tones
and shift. Two sets of different modem tone combinations are
available:
Stop
Mag;
1070 Hz
IQNL Sgecification
0 Bell 103 Originate
1 Bell 103 Answer 2025 Hz
2 Bell 202 1200 Hz
3 Bell 202 Equalized 1200 Hz
Start
Sgace
1270 Hz
2225 Hz
2200 Hz
2200 Hz
Ilgg gÂ§ Service
HF 300 bauds
HF 300 bauds
VHF 1200 bauds
VHF 1200 bauds
TONE 3 provides a significant degree of frequency response equaliza-
tion in the modem receiver. TONE 3 may be beneficial when working
with radio receivers whose high frequency audio response is less than
adequate.
In general practice, use Bell 103 tones at the lower data rates for HF
radio, and Bell 202 tones for higher data rates authorized above 28
MHz in many countries.
Note that the PK-88 is shipped strapped for the Bell standard tones
used in North America.
5-B5 PK88-167

PK-88 O
PERATING MANUAL commnn SUMMARY
TRACE 0N|0FF Mnemonic: TRAC Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Trace function is activated
OFF - Trace function is disabled.
The TRACE command activates the AX.2S protocol display. If TRACE is
ON, all received frames are displayed in their entirety, including all
header information.
NOTE: Be careful using the mnemonic - don't use 'TRA'! The PK-88
will change to Transparent Model
The TRACE display is shown as it appears on an 80-column display. The
following monitored frame is a sample:
WXlAAA*>TESTER <UI>:
This is a test message packet.
Byte Hex Shifted ASCII ASCII
O00
010
020
: A88AA6A8 8AA460AE 6h94AAAO A06lO3F0 TESTEROWXlAAAO.x . . . .
..'.d...@a
: 5h686973 20697320 61207h6S 73742060 *449.49.0.:29:.6 This is a test
65737361 67652070 61636565 7Ã©2EOD 299032.80l52:.. essage packet.
The byte column shows the offset into the packet of the beginning byte
of the line.
The hex display column shows the next 16 bytes of the packet, exactly
as received, in standard hex format. The shifted ASCII column decodes
the high-order seven hits of each byte as an ASCII character code.
The ASCII column decodes the low-order seven bits of each byte as an
ASCII character code.
In a standard AX.25 packet,
o The call sign address field is displayed correctly in the shifted
ASCII column.
o A text message is displayed correctly in the ASCII column.
o Non-printing characters and control characters are displayed in
both ASCII fields as a period ('.').
You can examine the hex display field to see the contents of the SSID
or extension byte and the control bytes used by the protocol.
5-86 PK88-l68

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
TRANS Mnemonic: T Immediate Command
TRANS is an immediate command that switches the PK-88 switch from the
Command Mode to Transparent Mode. The current state of the radio link
is not affected.
Transparent Mode is primarily useful for computer communications. In
Transparent Mode, â€˜human interfaceâ€˜ features such as input editing,
echoing of input characters, and type-in flow control are disabled.
0 Use Transparent Mode for transferring binary or other non-text
files.
TRFLOW 0N|OFF Mnemonic: TRF Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Software flow control for the computer or terminal can be
activated in Transparent Mode.
OFF - Software flow control for the computer or terminal is dis-
abled in Transparent Mode.
If TRFLOU is ON, the type of flow control used in Transparent Mode is
determined by how START and STOP are set.
If TRFLOW is OFF, only 'hardware' flow control (CTS, RTS) is available
to the computer and all characters received by the PK-88 are transÂ»
mitted as data.
If START and STOP are set to $00, the User Stop and User Start char>
acters are disabled - hardware flow control must be used by the com-
puter.
If TRFLDW is ON, and START and STOP are set to values other than zero,
software flow control is enabled for the user's computer or terminal.
The PK-B8 responds to the User Start and User Stop characters (set by
START and STOP) while remaining transparent to all other characters
from the terminal.
Unless TXFLOW is also ON, only hardware flow control is available to
the PK-88 to control output from the terminal.
5-87 PK88-169

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUHARY
TRIES 'n' Mnemonic: TR1 Default: 0
Parameters:
'n' - O to 15 specifies the current RETRY level on the selected
input channel.
TRIES retrieves (or forces) the count of â€˜triesâ€™ on the data channel
presently selected.
If you type TRIES without an argument, the PK-88 returns the current
number of tries if an outstanding unacknowledged frame exists. If no
outstanding unacknowledged frame exists, the PK-88 returns the number
of tries required to get an ACK for the previous frame.
If RETRY is set to zero (0), the TRIES command always returns zero
(0)-
Use TRIES for gathering statistics on a given path or channel. TRIES
is especially useful for computer-operated stations (such as automatic
message-forwarding stations) using less-than-optimal, noisy HF or sat-
ellite channels or paths.
Using TRIES under these conditions automatically optimizes the PACLEN
and MAXFRAME parameters.
If you type TRIES with an argument, the â€˜triesâ€™ counter is forced to
the entered value. Using this command to force a new count of tries
is not recommended.
5-88 PK88-170

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
TXDELAY 'nâ€˜ Mnemonic: TX Default: 30 (300 ms)
Parameters:
â€˜n' - O to 120 specifies ten-millisecond intervals.
The TXDELAY command tells the PK-38 how long to wait before sending
packet frame data after keying your transmitter's PTT line.
All transmitters need some amount of start-up time to put a signal on
the air; some need more, some need less. Some general rules apply:
o Crystal~controlled radios with diode T/R switches are faster;
0 Synthesized radios need time for phase-lock loops (PLLs) to lock;
o Radios with mechanical T/R relays need more time.
Experiment to determine the best TXDELAY value for a specific radio.
TXDELAY can also compensate for delays in the distant station's radio.
If the distant station's radio has slow recovery or release times when
switching from transmit to receive, increasing your TXDELAY may permit
improved throughput by retarding the start of your data until the dis-
tant receiver has reached full sensitivity.
TXFLDU 0N|OFF Mnemonicz TXF
Default: OFF
Parameters:
ON - Software flow control for the
Transparent Mode.
Software flow control for the
parent Mode.
OFF -
PK-88 can be activated in
PK-88 is disabled in Trans-
When TXFIDW is ON, the setting of XFLDU
control used in Transparent Mode.
When TXFLQW is OFF, the PK-88 uses only
data sent to the terminal remains fully
When TXFLOW and XFLOW are ON, the PK-88
acters (set by XON and XOFF) to control
Unless TRFLDU is also ON, only hardware
determines the type of flow
hardware flow control; all
transparent.
uses the Start and Stop char-
the input from the terminal.
flow control is available to
the computer or terminal to control output from the PK-88.
If the PK-88 Start and Stop characters are set to $00, hardware flow
control will always be selected regardless of the setting of TXFLOW.
5<89
PK88~17l

PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL COHAND SUMMARY
UNPROTO calll [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]] Mnemonic: U Default: CQ
Parameters:
calll - Call sign to be placed in the T0 address field.
call2-9 - Optional digipeater call list, up to eight calls.
UNPROTO sets the digipeat and destination address fields of packets
sent in the unconnected (unprotocol) mode.
Unconnected packets are sent as unsequenced I-frames with the destina~
tion and digipeat fields taken from 'call1' through 'call9' options.
When a destination is not specified, unconnected packets are sent to
'CQ_-
Unconnected packets sent from other packet stations can be monitored
by setting MONITOR to a value greater than '1' and setting MFROH to
ALL.
The digipeater list can also be used for beacon packets.
To send a beacon message through one or more digipeaters, type the
following:
cmd:UNPROTO BEACON VIA WXlAAA,WX2BBB,WX3CCC
Your beacon is routed to and repeated by each of the digipeaters in
the order listed.
USERS 'n' Mnemonic: US Default: l
Parameters:
'n' - O to 10 specifies the number of active simultaneous connec-
tions that can be established with the PK-88.
USERS only affects the way that incoming connect requests are handled.
It does not affect the number of connections you initiate with the
PK-B8. For example:
USERS 0 allows incoming connections on any free logical channel
USERS 1 allows incoming connections on logical channel 0 only
USERS 2 allows incoming connections on logical channels 0 and l
USERS 3 allows incoming connections on logical channels 0, l and 2,
and so on, through USERS 10.
5-90 PKB8-172

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
XFLOU 0N|OFF Mnemonic: XF Default: ON
Parameters:
ON ~ XON/XOFF (software) flow control is activated.
OFF - XON/XOFF flow control is disabled - hardware flow control
is enabled.
When XFLDW is ON, software flow control is in effect - it's assumed
that the computer or terminal will respond to the PK-88's Start and
Stop characters defined by the XON and XOFF commands.
when XFLOW is OFF, the PK-88 uses hardware flow control commands on
the CTS and RTS line.
For full hardware control in both directions, set XFLOW to OFF.
This type of hardware flow control is frequently required by certain
host computer applications, electronic mail and some bulletin board
systems.
XHITOK ONIOFF Mnemonic: XMITO Default: ON
Earameters:
ON - Transmit functions (PTT line) are active.
OFF - Transmit functions (PTT line) are disabled.
When XMITOK is OFF, the PTT line to your transmitter is disabled ~ the
transmit function is inhibited. All other PK-88 functions remain the
same. The PK-88 generates and sends packets as requested, but does
not key the radio's PTT line.
Use the XMITOK command at any time to ensure that the PK-88 does not
transmit.
Set XMITOK OFF if you're absent and wish to leave the PKÂ»88 on as a
channel activity monitor.
Set XMITOK OFF for testing in loopback or direct wire connections when
PTT operation is not required.
5-91 PK88-173

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL COMMAND SUMMARY
XOFF 'n' Hnemonic: X0 Default: $13 <CTRL-S>
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to $7F (O to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
Use XOFF to select the Stop character to be used to stop input from
the computer or terminal.
o You can enter the code in either hex or decimal.
The Stop character default value is <CTRL-S> for computer data trans-
fers.
If you're operating in Converse Mode, and there is a chance that acti-
vity might fill the PK-88's buffers, you can define the Stop charac-
ter as <CTRL-G> ($07), which 'beeps' many terminals.
XON 'n' Mnemonic: XON Default: $11 <CTRL-Q>
Parameters:
'n' - 0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.
XON selects the PK-88 Start character that is sent to the computer or
terminal to restart input from that device.
0 You can enter the code in either hex or decimal.
The Start character default value is <CTRL-Q> for computer data trans-
fers.
If you're operating in Converse Mode, and there is a chance that acti-
vity might fill the PK-88's buffers, you can define the Stop charac-
ter as <CTRL-G> ($07), which 'beeps' many terminals.
5-92 PK88-17b

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1
6.2
6
.2.l
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Introduction
UARNINGII
NEVER REMOVE OR INSERT AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DEVICE
WITH POWER APPLIED
The AEA PK-88 is a complex piece of electronic equipment. Servicing
must be performed in a logical manner. Prepare for troubleshooting by
studying the circuit diagram in the appendices.
Although it is not possible to present all possible problems, symptoms
and probable solutions, this section offers general troubleshooting
directions based on our experience.
General Tests
In most cases, careful visual inspection combined with simple measure-
ments usually reveals the problem.
The single most-useful tool for troubleshooting is a digital voltmeter
(DVH) for reading AC and DC voltages, one that permits non-destructive
resistance measurements while the integrated circuits are still in
their sockets.
Although some tests can be done without the aid of an Oscilloscope,
certain signals must be verified at various points on the board if the
problem cannot be located by visual means or with a meter.
Avoid short-circuiting pins on integrated circuits when connecting
meter or oscilloscope probes to the board. It is good practice to
attach a secure ground wire to the meter or oscilloscope, some point
that cannot accidentally short-circuit components on the board.
A good point to pick up this ground is pin-l of the Radio connector J2
Power Supply
Verify Fuse Fl. If the fuse is intact, then verify the power supply
for correct operation. Verify power supply levels at the outputs of
voltage regulators ICl and DC-to~DC converter IC3.
o Are the voltages close to their nominal values?
o Do all the integrated circuits in the suspected area have tho
proper voltage on their power pins?
o Is there excessive ripple in any of the DC voltage lines?
o If so, verify the regulator and associated components, working
backwards toward the input power source.
o If the voltage is low in conjunction with a hot regulator, sus-
pect a short circuit on the board, or defective (hot) integrated
circuit.
6~l PK88-175

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
6.272
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
6.3.1
Obvious Problems
Look for any unusual physical symptoms.
0 Are any components discolored?
o Does something smell burned?
0 Do any of the parts seems excessively warm?
Assembly Problems
Carefully inspect the PC board and component installation.
o Are all the socketed ICs firmly seated in their sockets?
o Are any IC leads folded under the chip or bent so that they
aren't making proper contact with the integrated circuit socket?
Cabling Problems
Inspect the interconnection cabling. Where possible, substitute a
spare PK-88 or other compatible TNC and attempt normal operation.
o Do the cables perform correctly with another controller?
o Has the radio and/or terminal been successfully used with this or
another controller?
0 Are all the connections tight?
o Does the cable appear frayed or broken?
Specific Symptoms
Although the above steps may seem obvious, careful visual inspection
often points to a problem or provides significant indications as to
the PK*88's most suspect area.
Proceed to more specific analysis after completing the physical
inspection and dealing with the apparent problems.
Symptom: PK-88 appears dead
If QQ LEDS are lit at startup or reset:
o Verify that the external power source is properly connected.
0 Verify that the external power supply has sufficient current
capacity to drive the PK-88.
0 Verify the 74HCT574 LED driver device at location IC9.
0 Verify that system clock Y1 is operating and that a square wave
signal (4.9l52 MHZ, 0 to +5 volts) exists at IC16 pin 6. The
clock signal should be a moderately-distorted square wave.
6-2 PK88-l76

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
If the PK~88 responds to initial power application with ALL the LEDS
lit but fails to respond to any commands:
0 Verify that the 27256 EPROM at ICl5 is correctly installed with
the indicator notch position matching the marking on the PCB.
0 Verify that the PK-88's power source can provide at least 500
milliamperes continuous current at l3 volts DC.
If the PK-88 responds to initial power application with only the MULT
LED lit but fails to respond to any commands
o Suspect the terminal port at this point. The processor and the
software in EPROM are probably operating correctly.
o Verify the cable between the PK-88 and the terminal.
o Verify logic levels according to the terminal interface trouble-
shooting section in this chapter.
Digital Logic Lines
All logic circuits operate at standard TTL levels. "Low" is less than
+0.8 V; "High" is greater than +2.6 volts. All digital inputs and
outputs alternate between these two levels.
NOTE: Make these measurements ONLY with an oscilloscope!
o If logic signals are alternating between 0 and perhaps l volt,
there is a problem, usually a short circuit.
o Do not mistake switching transients on logic lines for improper
operation - such transients appear as ringing and distortions.
0 Verify with the oscilloscope that activity exists on the follow-
ing lines:
ADDRESS LINE A0
DATA LINE D0
CHIP ENABLE CE*
OUTPUT ENABLE OE*
READ LINE RD*
WRITE LINE WR*
PCLK
CLOCK TRXCA
CLOCK RTXCA
IClb
ICIA
ICl5
ICl5
IClb
ICIA
ICl2
ICl2
ICl2
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Each of these lines should show activity. If any line is inactive,
this is a sign of trouble.
Logic lines that do not show activity can often be traced to a short
circuit on the printed circuit board.
PK88-l77

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
6.3.2
6.3.3
Short circuits on the address and data lines can also appear as lack
of activity on the control bus lines, especially device select lines.
o Verify each of the 16 address and 8 data lines for activity. Any
lines showing a lack of activity are not operating properly.
o Remove all memory chips if you suspect problems with address or
data lines. Each address and data line will now show a distinct
pattern. The address lines should be (possibly distorted) square
waves whose periods increase by a factor of two on successive
lines as you move line by line from A0 to A15.
o If you use an Ohmmeter to look for short-circuited lines, make
sure it is a low-voltage, low-current test instrument. Host
modern digital voltmeters are adequate for such tests.
Disconnect the power source and remove any integrated circuits
connected to the lines being measured if in doubt.
o If you suspect a short circuit, verify the high-density areas of
the printed circuit board for the problem.
Symptom: Transmitter cannot be keyed
If the transmitter cannot be keyed and the DCD LED is not lit:
o Verify the watchdog timer circuit at TR3 and TR2.
o Verify PTT driver transistors TR1, TR5 and TRG.
o Verify timing capacitor C18.
Symptom: Transmitted signals not copyable by other stations
If stations are unable to decode your transmissions when using VHF FM:
o Verify your transmitter's deviation or modulation index. Verify
that peak deviation at any tone does not exceed 4 KHz.
o Verify that your transmitterâ€˜: modulation limiting circuits are
not being driven into limiting or clipping, and that both tones
are being transmitted in the correct amplitude ratio. A standard
deviation meter should show the higher (Space or Start) tone to
be higher in amplitude than the lower (Mark or Stop) tone.
0 Adjust the PK-88's AFSK output level with the internal adjustment
potentiometer VR1 to produce the correct transmitter deviation.
o Verify that your TXDELAY is long enough for the distant station's
receiver to recover from transmit mode and squelch. Increase
your TXDELAY in increments of 10 (100 milliseconds) to see if the
distant station's decoding improves.
6-4 PK88-178

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
If stations are unable to decode your transmissions when using SSE:
o Verify that you're using the same sideband used by the other sta-
tions in your network. (Although packet radio produces the same
results on either sideband, the choice of LSB or USB may affect
your radio tuning display or calibration.)
0 Verify that the transmitter's audio input stage and ALE systems
are not being overdriven.
o Adjust the transmitterâ€˜s microphone gain in accordance with the
radio manufacturer's duty-cycle, plate current and power dissip>
ation specifications.
o If reducing the radio's gain control does not solve the problem,
adjust the PK-86's AFSK output level to produce the correct
transmitter operating conditions.
6.3.6 Symptom: Received signals not copyable
If unable to correctly decode signals from other stations:
0000
Verify that TONE is set for the proper modem tones.
Verify that the PK-88 is set to the proper HBAUD link rate.
Inject a 1200Â»H2 test tone into Pin A of J2.
Verify audio signal flow through C23, R18, U6 Pins 3 and 1, and
that the audio tone appears at U10 Pin 5.
6.4 Terminal Interface Troubleshooting
If the PK-88 does not appear to start, respond to commands, or accept
data from the terminal, the problem may be in the RS-2326 interface.
The following troubleshooting suggestions can aid in resolving prob-
lems related to the RS-232C port.
6.h.l Symptom: PK-88 does not communicate with the terminal.
Use a â€˜breakout boxâ€˜ or oscilloscope to verify that correct control
voltages are present on pins A, 5, 6 and 8 of J1, the RS-232 I/O
connector.
o Verify that the RTS line on Pin 4 of J1 (the RS-232 I/0 connec-
tor) are not being held low.
If the PK-88 software flow control is disabled by setting XFLDW to
OFF, the controller will not send data to the terminal unless RTS is
asserted.
If the computer or terminal does not provide the DTR/CTS protocol or
"handshake", the DTR/CTS lines (pins 20 and 5 on J1) should not be
connected .
0 Verify that the voltages on the PK-88 are correct.
5.5 1>\<ss-179

PK-83 OPERATING MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
6.b.2
6.4.3
If the tests are valid, verify the signal on U12 pin 27 with an oscil-
loscupe.
o Recycle the power switch on the PK-88. Transitions on this pin
shortly after reset indicate that the PK-88 is sending data.
o Verify that transitions are also present on Uh pin 13.
Symptom: PK-88 signs on with mutilated data
If the terminal displays strange characters, â€™garbage', graphics,
etc., one or more of the following parameter values is incorrectly set
and does not agree between the terminal and the PK-88:
data rate (TBAUD)
data word length (AWLEN)
parity (PARITY)
number of start and stop bits
0 Set the terminal rate to 1200 bauds if possible, seven data bits,
even parity, and one stop bit. These are the default settings
stored in the PK-88's EPROM.
o Restart the PKâ€”88 by cycling the power switch OFF then ON (out
then in). The sign on message should appear.
If the PK-88 still prints gibberish:
o Verify that the terminal is set to 1200 bauds and recycle the
power switches on both the PK-88 and terminal.
If the sign-on message still fails to appear:
o Verify signals with an oscilloscope connected to TXD pin 25 of
U12, the Z8530A chip, and then at the X32 baud rate clock (38.h
KHZ at 1200 bauds) on pin lb of U12.
Symptom: PK-88 does not respond or accept commands.
Type a command such as MYCALL or any other command. If the default
settings are in effect, the PKâ€”88 should echo typed characters back to
the screen.
0 Verify that U12 pin 21 shows a positive voltage level.
If the above tests are valid:
o Type any keys on the terminal and verify that data is present on
U12 pin 27 and Uh pin ll.
If data is not seen, the data is not reaching the PK-88 from the ter-
minal.
o Verify J1, the cable, and Uh again.
6-6 PK88-l80

PKâ€”88 OPERATING MANUAL APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
PK-88 COMPLETE COMMAND LIST
NOTE: Certain commands and parameters shown in the following alphabetical
listing do not appear in response to the DISPLAY command.
COMMAND NEMONIC DEFAULT FUNCTION
SBITCONV
ACRDISP
ACRPACK
ADDRESS
AFILTER
ALFDISP
ALFPACK
AWLEN
AX25L2V2
AXDELAY
AXHANG
BBSMSGS
BEACON
BKONDEL
BTEXT
CALIBRA
CANLINE
CANPAC
CASEDISP
CBELL
CFROM
CHCALL
CHDOUBLE
CHECK
CHSWITCH
CLKADJ
CMDTIME
CMSG
COMMAND
CONMODE
CONNECT
CONOK
CONPERM
CONSTAMP
CONVERSE
CPACTIME
CR
CSTATUS
CTEXT
DAYSTAMP
DAYTIME
DELETE
BB
ACRD
ACRP
ADD
AF
ALFD
ALFP
AW
A
AXD
AXH
BBS
B
BK
BT
CAL
CAN
CANP
CAS
CB
CF
CHC
CHD
CH
CNS
CLK
CM
CMS
COM
CONM
C
CONO
CONP
CONS
CONV
CP
CR
CS
CT
DAYS
DA
DEL
OFF
80
ON
Enter hex addresses
OFF
ON
OFF
8 (set by autobaud)
ON
O (O0 msec.)
0 (000 msec.)
OFF
EVERY 0 (00 sec.)
ON
(E"\PÂ¢Y)
Immediate Command
$18 <C'l'RL-X>
$19 <CTRL-Y>
0 (as is)
OFF
all
OFF
OFF
30 (300 sec.)
$00
0
l0 (1000 msec.)
OFF
$03 <c'm.-c>
CONVERSE
Immediate Command
ON
OFF
OFF
Immediate Command
OFF
ON
Immediate Command
(Text)
OFF
None
OFF
A-1
Strip bit 7 in CONVERSE
Screen width
Add <CR> to packet
For MEMORY & I0 commands
Never send MFILTER characters
Send LF after <CR> to terminal
Send LF after <CR>, packet
Data bits per word, to terminal
Operate as AX.25 Version l.O
Repeater key-up delay (X10 ms)
Repeater hang time (X10 ms)
Use TAPR-style status messages
Set beacon timing (X10 seconds)
Send BS SP BS for DELETE char.
120-byte BEACON message text
Start calibrate mode
Line delete character
Packet delete character
Display case (as is/lower/UPPER)
Enable â€˜Connectâ€™ bell
Connect request accept/reject
Show call sign after channel ID
Show CHSWITCH character twice
Idle link timeout (X10 seconds)
Channel-select (Link) character
Correction to real-time clock
Transparent Mode escape timer
Send CTEXT message to caller
Character escape to COMAND Mode
Mode to enter when link starts
Send connect request to <cal1>
Synonym for CFROM ALL
Never disconnect this link
Mark connections with time/date
Start Converse Mode from Command
Use packet timeout in Converse
Synonym for ACRPACK
Show status of channels (links)
120-byte CONNECT message text
Include DATE in time stamp
Set/read PK-88 internal clock
Use BS ($08), not DEL ($7F)
PK88>18l

PK-B8 OPERATING MANUAL APPENDIX A
PK-B8 COMPLETE COMMAND LIST (Continued)
COMMAND WNEMONIC DEFAULT FUNCTION
DFROM
DIGIPEAT
DISCONNE
DISPLAX
DWAIT
ECHO
ESCAPE
FLOW
FRACK
FULLDUP
HBAUD
HEADERLN
HELP
MID
HOST
HPOLL
ID
ILFPACK
IO
K
KISS
MAILDROP
MAXFRAME
MBELL
MBX
MCON
MDCHECK
MDIGI
MDMON
MDPROMPT
MEMORY
MFILTER
MFROM
WHEARD
MONITOR
MPROTO
MRPT
MSTAMP
MTO
MYALIAS
MYCALL
NEUMODE
NOMODE
NUCR
NULF
NULLS
PACLEN
PACTIME
DF
DIG
D
DISP
DW
E
ES
F
FR
FU
MB
HE
M
MI
MOST
MPOLL
I
IL
IO
K
Kl
MAI
MAX
MBE
MB
MC
MDC
MD
MDM
MDP
ME
MFI
MF
MH
M
MP
MR
MS
MT
MYA
MY
NE
N0
NU
NUL
NULL
PACL
PACT
ALL
ON
Immediate Command
Immediate Command
16 (l60 msec.)
ON
OFF
ON
3 (3 sec.)
OFF
1200
ON
None
OFF
OFF
ON
Immediate Command
ON
Enter hex addresses
Immediate Command
OFF
OFF
b
OFF
none, (enter calls)
O (zero)
Immediate Command
OFF
ON
Enter message, (etc.)
Enter hex addresses
$80
all
Immediate Command
l+(UADMCDIUI)
ON
ON
OFF
none
none; enter yours
PK88; enter yours
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
0 (zero)
128
AFTER l0 (1000 msec.)
A-2
Selective digipeat call list
Allow digipeating (TAPR)
Send DISC to distant station
Show PK-88 parameters/classes
Delay for digi repeat (X10 ms)
Echo typed keyboard characters
Send ESC character $lB as $24
Stop echo to screen while typing
Time (X1 sec) to wait for ACK
Full-Duplex terminal operation
Packet link (radio) baud rate
Insert <CR> after headers
Show brief HELP text on screen
Send ID UI packet every 9.5 mins
Host/terminal interface
Most poll, packet mode
Force ID packet via Unproto path
Ignore line feeds in packet xmit
Read/write IO register
Same as CONVERSE
Use KISS TNC protocol
Activate personal MailDrop.
Maximum unâ€”ACK'd frames allowed
Beep if selected call is heard
Monitor channel without headers
Monitor while connected (0-6)
Log on to MailDrop as Sys0p
Monitor digipeated frames
Monitor callers on Mailbrop
Prompt sent to MailDrop callers
Read/write memory location
Filter controls less CR, LF, TAB
Monitor MFROM call signs
Display call signs heard
Monitor mode level select (O~6)
Monitor I-frames with PID $FO
Show digipeaters in headers
Time-stamp monitored frames
Monitor MTO call signs
Alternate MYCALL
Your call sign packet address
Return to Command mode at DISC
Don't change modes unless told
Nulls to terminal after <CR>
Nulls to terminal after <LF>
Number of nulls for NUCR & NULF
# of user-typed bytes in packet
Packet transmit timer (X100 ms)
PK88-182

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL APPENDIX A
PK-83 COMPLETE COHAND LIST (Continued)
COMMAND MNEMONIC DEFAULT FUNCTION
PARITY
PASS
PASSALL
PERSIST
PPERSIST
RAUHDLC
REDISPLA
RELINK
RESET
RESPTIHE
RESTART
RETRY
SENDPAC
SIDTTIHE
SQUELCH
START
STOP
TBAUD
TCLEAR
TIME
TONE
TRACE
TRANS
TRFLOW
TRIES
TXDELAY
TXFLDW
UNPROTO
USERS
XFLOW
XHITOK
XOFF
XON
PAR
PAS
PASSA
PE
PP
RAW
RED
REL
RESET
RES
RESTART
RE
SE
SL
SQ
STA
STD
TB
TC
TI
TO
TRAC
T
TRF
TRI
TX
TXF
U
US
XF
XMITO
X0
XON
0 (none) (autobaud)
$16 <CTRL-V>
OFF
63
ON
OFF
$12 <CTRL-R>
OFF
Immediate Command
5 (500 msec.)
Immediate Command
10
$OD <CTRL-H
IO (100 msec.)
OFF
$11 <CTRL-Q>
$13 <CTRL-S>
1200 (autobaud)
Immediate Command
$14 <CTRL<T>
3 (1200/2200 eq)
OFF
Immediate Command
OFF
O (zero)
30 (300 msec.)
OFF
CQ
1
ON
ON
$13 <CTRL-S>
s 1 1 <CTRL-Q>
A<3
Terminal program parity (0-3)
Pass input editing character
Ignore CRC in HDLC (â€˜Junk Modeâ€˜)
P-persistent CSMA threshold
p-persistence instead of DWAIT
Raw HDLC mode
Redisplay current input buffer
Reconnect after retrying out
RESET bbRAM to factory defaults
Minimum delay before sending ACK
Same as power-on/off reset
Maximum number of frame repeats
Character that â€˜sendsâ€™ a packet
P-persistent slot time in msecs
Select receiver squelch polarity
Resume sending data to terminal
Stop sending data to terminal
Set terminal data rate
Clear Transmit Buffer
Insert 'send timeâ€™ in text
Select modem tone pairs
Hex dump of packet frame
Start Transparent Data Mode
Terminal flow ctrl - Transparent
Show or force retry count
PTT key-to-data delay (X10 ms)
PK<88 flow control - Transparent
Path/address to send UI frames
# of multi-connections allowed
Software flow control
PTT line can be keyed
Stop sending data to terminal
Resume sending data to terminal
PK88-183

APP END IX B
WARRANTY
PK 88 OPERATING MANUAL ,u>pEm>1x 13
LIMITED WARRANTY
ADVANCED ELECTRONIC APPLICAYONS. INC. warrants to the original purchaser
that this product shall be tree lrom detects in material or worltmanship tor ninety days
lrom the dale ot original purchase. ln order toobtain warranty service: (I) Cornpleteand
mail the warranty registration card within I0 days to Advanced Electronic Applications.
lnc., and (2) Send written notilicaticin to the address below or telephone as soon as
possible alter discovering a possible detect"
Advanced Electronic Applications, lnc
Attention: Service Department
2006 < I951?! S W
Lyttnwood. WA 93036
The written ndtitication must include a copy ot the invoice. Include a description ol the
detective part or condition. with details at the electrical connections to associated
equipment and lisl such equipment, Please enclose your name. phone number. and
address. Shipping charges tor any parts or units submitted tor replacement under this
warranty must be paid by the purchaser.
Correct maintenance. repair and use are important to insure proper pertormance tron-i
this product Carelully read the Instruction Manual. This warranty does not apply to any
detect AEA determines is caused by (t) improper maintenance or repair, including the
installation ot parts or accessories that do not coritorrn to the quality and specilication ol
the original pans. (2) misuse. abuse, neglect, or improper installation, (3) accidental or
intentional damage. The tield installation ol circuits or batteries according to the
lï¬�SUUCllOIâ€™\S l|'\ the manual WIII not nullity this warranty
All implied warranties, it any, terminate ninety days trom the irate or original purchase.
Aâ‚¬A is not responsible lor damage to other equipment or property or any other
consequential or incidental damage 0| any kind whether based on contract. nggligence.
or strict |lI|)i|llY Mammurn liability shall not. in any case. exceed the purchase price ot
the unit
The loregoing constitutes AEA's entire obligation with respect to this product. The
original purchaser and any user or owner shall have no other remedy and no claim tor
incidental or consequential damages Some states do not allovii limitations ot how long
art implied warranty lasts or do now allow the exclusion ol incidental or consequential
damages, theretore, the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
THIS -iiairariiy gives specitic legal rigriis voii may also have otiiei rignis wmcri vary |l'Olâ€™l'I
Sl3lâ‚¬ |O SIMS
B-1
PK88-184

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL APPENDIX C
ILQTEI
APPENDIX C
TTL SERIAL INTERFACE
HEADER INSTALLATION
The PK-B8 comes from the factory configured for RS-232 Voltage levels
on the 25-pin serial communication port. This is the most popular and
indeed the safest way to connect your PK-88 to a terminal or computer.
If your computer has an RS-232C compatible serial interface, then you
do not need to bother with the following TTL information.
Not all computers support RS-232 voltage levels on their serial
interfaces which can be a problem if your computer supports only TTL
(0 and 5 Volt) voltage levels. Many of these computers such as the
commodore 64 and 128 have RS-232 adapters available that will convert
the computer's TTL levels to those compatible with RS-232C.
We recommend that you use an RS-232 level converter if one is
available for your computer. If you have no way of making the
computer produce RS-232 levels, then the following instructions
describe how to make the PK-88 compatible with TTL voltage levels.
Included with the PK-88 are two lb-pin DIP headers that allow the
PK-88 to generate and accept TTL (0 and 5 Volt) voltage levels on the
25-pin serial interface connector. To enable TTL operation of the
serial interface, two socketed IC chips must be removed from the PK-88
and the two included DIP headers installed in their place.
This procedure may be accomplished as follows:
When working on any electronic equipment, the work area should be
as static free as possible. Try to avoid working in carpeted
areas as rugs increase the chance your body will acquire a static
charge. It is also a good idea to discharge any static you may
have acquired by touching a grounded metal appliance before
opening the TNC or working on any internal components.
1. Remove power and all other connections from the PK-88.
2. Open the PK-88 by removing the 4 screws that hold the top
chassis in place.
3. Carefully remove the PK-B8 top chassis and orient the PK-88 so
the rear of the unit faces to the left.
4. Locate IC4 (lA89) and IC5 (1488) immediately behind the 25-pin
Serial I/O Connector on the rear of the PK-88 Printed Circuit
Board as shown in figure Bl. These are the RS-232 line-
driver/receiver chips that provide/accept the RS-232 voltage
levels on the serial interface.
5. Remove both IC4 and IC5 by carefully inserting a small
straight-blade screwdriver between the socket and the IC and
prying upward gently.
C-l PK88-185

PK-B8 OYERATING MANUAL
E11
APPENDIX C
6. Open the plastic bag that contains the DIP Headers, and remove
the one that has only two wire jumpers attached. This header
should be inserted into socket ICA such that both wires are
closest to the rear of the PK-88 as shown below.
7. Remove the other DIP Header from the plastic bag. This Header
should have 3 jumper wires soldered between the pins. Insert
this Header into socket IC5 such that the side that has only
one jumper wire on it is towards the PK-88 power switch.
9, Place the chips you removed from the PK-88 into the plastic bag
that held the Headers for safe keeping. These chips will be
needed to restore RS-232 capability to the PK-88 if desired.
10. Carefully replace the PK-88 top chassis and the four screws
that hold it in place.
This completes the TTL Serial conversion of the PK-88. There are a
few things you should be aware of when connecting a TTL or RS-232
computer to the PK-B8. The ONLY pins that should EVER be wired in a
TTL configuration are pins l-5, 7, and 8. All other pins should be
left unconnected .
This is especially true of pin-6 which is the RS-232 DSR signal.
This pin is wired through a resistor to +10 volts and should NEVER
Be connected to a 'I'lâ€˜L level computer under any circumstances.
1-
IHIIHEEIH
IIEHIIBH
â€”
Q
IEIEIEIIHEHEI
BBB
C
-. _Â»_
-, --
IQ _w._
Â»> ---
-n -Â»-Dâ€œ 5
Â»~ nuÂ»:
1
1;Â». "â€˜
. -Â»-
~ m B17 ,,,
4 r'\ f\
=1
m_ _
' Mg 9?":-
â€”f
Ti...
wn :19
-0- U <>
1| -.~Â»_ 5Â» <>
mu
Pxvaa Â° â€˜.1.'.â€™;â€˜.'Z'. "f.â€™!â€˜3iâ€œâ€˜
-- 6
,.
,.  J,
.__-u_ â€”-â€”,,
1Â®Â¢ n â€˜-
' = *2. â€˜:3; -
5 _ =, .. =r
1 #*FE1_,;
rmn-=Â» 5
â€œW M
Figure C-l TTL Header Installation Diagram.
PK88-136

â€˜-â€˜*1
"'   =1 A
â€˜ a â€˜ 
 Lssusia
-mmmmm
V-â€œ?555Â§5F=!P.!i!5P
J . .
mmi
huzmlului
 mmi
%!.!.!!.!.!.!F5_
|. \>-nu-Â¢,--4.-..__
._ I-Imp: -1'. .
'_ 1
  â€˜
â€˜ , nâ€”
- "Hi:
"
~-
}Ã©
.$
I z
1
1
!!iÂ§Â§.Â§5iâ€”__
'= â€˜ is " â€˜ =H'
'=_=;'=â€˜ 2 
 .-_ â€˜
9-4
1 1 I l '
.|'-EFL
u.
ea
B
.-
wan
ulna ""
uz; â€œâ€˜
_ -
"Fm-
rq- In
I 41
" BA
u
_ - -. 
5 3
, |.. .1 =';  I( m-
â€”-- ~ ~,..., .,.,
M - 211121-5 ssm
_ ":.='= . . an -E
|iI - E
â€œ-1
_Eâ€”,
I
1 5 '_  -
  ' =51:  "
 Q  ~= â€™ - -    "   I, 
,_ ,  -in Â§ " Inn '. '
" -"1 ml  :1. ' -  H _ ~ '13 '
iÂ£ii?â€˜
3535?.â€˜
-ii .<
4;;
H
i I
m=%i
*1" '32.
"II-IP/Ni
=-  K   -g â€˜
 #4â€œ j. 25%! [ .1: ~.. ~
lg, gl Y _ I ,5    .
 L ~ 1" ï¬�b -â€œâ€� " 1   v-
.  =1â€˜Â£  Q-lg v
4
E
1.1
I
1,- - 1â€˜ â€˜-1 n I 5,. â€˜ -. ,
=:=
#1
55*
E

i "* *@
wja
1 1
8
 Z
131' n
--â€˜,,_. ... an. ! ..
1. ~ E52
an M 
1: 
_ - --
' â€œR
I ' |
"u .2â€™ â€˜n â€™
- Â»-..:. ,
QEA 29Â¥â‚¬â€™?EEâ€˜%1ShE?"f3Â§{â€˜
"'â€œ SCHEMATIC 01Â¢-Gnnm
PK-ll
.... .
lï¬‚_ â€˜W-866-88
mmzv s-14-Ba s~ezv 1 or 1
PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL APPENDIX D

APPENDIX D
OPERATING MANUAL
PK-B8
Q 1001,10â€œ wnn/AEA
PK- 88 All Wm. ....-M
â€˜ ca
Â¢ -â€˜*-
 U
E Â§ =9:
5; [Egg  F
u
4Â»
<; ow
Icz ass
' ~~
Â¥â€˜%R
51" cm
ca -1* en *" 1:10: W
=4 -~._
as -~Â»-
IS #lWâ€”
M -w.-
ll -w\- on -0-
nn -wÂ»- E
-44- â€”m~â€” IIZ
nu

1 :1
sf?!
12%â€˜
0
-0-
â€”~Â»-
@ 9, us Ra ( B
C!  ,,+ 3% Â§ â€”--â€” --- Â°" v ""
"lg? 5 ca -"- moo "5 â€˜"' man '" um K
g, -0- -0- c
.2
(:13 an M
M Mâ€˜"Â° -w- â€”-- nu
0 , In
LEI)!
â€™ â€˜W
%}[Z
%[
nu |c, I L
ca  
'3 â€œ"_ m7 mu an Q}
um
( D
'1â€˜ I 0Â°71
:": 5* __ @-
"_' ca: E5 =Â§ â€”-mâ€” was â€œâ€˜ â€˜ ( B
so â€”-w- nan c _ nu an
_~,,_"" us:
_"â€�â€˜ mu 1"â€� M3 gt?
av
-wÂ»-
Di] mo
UB7
 < 1Â»
ï¬�ns can
um
â€œA ' <v- #1 c (
:42 _L,,_
cse -0- cm -u~ LSD! :4; 0- â€œW "> 15:2 W 1* mu I "W?
1
car
n vs A-w-.-.â€”'
we
2 â€˜mag Q
5 MU
S
4" -II
H
CZ! .* Q
I5-2
C20
<0-
,-,, "* me) | mvf  ww) I 'Â°â€˜Â°> J E tm
â€˜D >
nan -ww I ) "4 -4Â» ",9, C52Â» L5â€œ 5? more â€˜%Â§,,,?
me nan -W-â€”
uv W  7
C4! 17-
m~â€” Â£4! â€”-v-- JIWICZZ
can -0-
PK88-183
N
use 5,
41- Em
_ an ""c,â€œ|Â¢ 75*" I!\â€”~\~â€”l ass wows M JPâ€˜ ( B
Iii T Ill _Q - Q ICE I725!

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL AppEND|X E APPENDIX E
SPECIFIC RADIO CONNECTIONS
ME[.BAQI.Q
ICOM 4 PIN
8 PIN
HT'$
YAESU 4 PIN
6 PIN
7 PIN
B PIN
FT-X03
EIN_QUIN.QlEÂ§
WHITE 1
RED 2
BROWN 4
WHITE 1 SPEAKER AUDIOAVAILABLE ON PIN 8 OF SOME MODELSâ€˜
RED 5 GREEN WIRE SHOULD BE USED.
BROWN 6 8; 7
.Ier
u
n
r
Six
WHITE 2
RED 3
BROWN 1
RED 4
BROWN 5
WHITE 6
BROWN 1
WHITE 2
RED 3
WHITE 8
RED 6
BROWN 7
.1~:
X09 
727
FT~208
KENWOOD 4 PIN
5 PIN
2 7K
WHITE 1
RED 3
GREEN 2
BROWN 4
WHITE 1
RED 2
BROWN 3 81 4
WHITE 1
RED 2
BROWN 4 81 5
rrbxm 10 Vnd
Dnannllï¬‚n
Frhlm â€œO v_<
UD<nnZ2On
GREEN WIRE TO THE TIP OF THE LARGE CONNECTOR.
BROWN WIRE TO THE SLEEVE OF LARGE CONNECTOR.
NOTE: The wire colors listed in the PIN OUT
column assume you have wired the PK~88
RADIO connector as described in section
2.2.2 of this manual. These colors are:
PK-88
_J2_EIn Siqnamame
Ground
Push-To-Talk
Microphone Audio
Receive Audio
Squelch Input (Opt)
Color
\I(DO.)f\3â€”l
Brown
Red
White
Green
Black
FT-233/FT-2300
.1 uF CAP ON WHITE WIRE AND A DIODE ON THE RED WIRE
DIODE 1N4148.
GREEN WIRE TO THE TIP OF THE LARGE CONNECTOR.
BROWN WIRE TO THE SLEEVE OF THE LARGE
CONNECTOR.
NOTE; On all radios, the shield should go Io the same place as the brown wire, unless oihenuise noted.
E-l PK88-189

PK-88 OPERATING MANUAL
MEI. BADLQ
KENWOOD e PIN
8 PIN
TR-2500
TR-x600
and
TH-types
TR-751
TS-940
TS-440
TS-140
TS-711
TS-680
TS-790
TEN~TEC 4 PIN
1/4"
STEREO
AZDEN 12 PIN
8 PIN
NOTE: On all radios, the shield
E.IN.Q.UI
WHITE 1
RED 2
BROWN 6
WHITE 1
RED 2
SHIELD 7
BROWN 8
WHITE
RED
BROWN
GREEN
APPENDIX E
NQIES
> - <1 | - -> TIP OF LARGE coumzcron
suzevs OF LARGE conuecron
suzzve or SMALL couuecmn
TIP OF SMALL comuzcron
(0.1 rnicrolarad capacitor)
WHITE
RED
BROWN
GREEN
> - - I I ~ -> RING OF LARGE CONNECTOR
SLEEVE OF LARGE CONNECTOR
SLEEVE OF SMALL CONNECTOR
TIP OF SMALL CONNECTOR
(0.1 microlarad capacitor)
KENWOOD RECOMMENDS A 0.1 MICROFARAD CAP IN SERIES WITH
THE WHITE WIRE.
ON THESE RADIOS, THE 13 PIN ACC 2 CONNECTOR MAY BE USED
RED
SHIELD
WHITE
BROWN
GREEN
WHITE 1
RED 3
BROWN 2
WHITE
RED
BROWN
WHITE 12
RED 9
BROWN 2 &11
WHITE 1
RED 7
BROWN 2
PIN I3
PIN 12
PIN 11
PIN B
PIN 3
RING
TIP
SLEEVE
should go Io the same place as me brown wire, unless olhenuise noted
E- 2 PI(88< 190

PK-88 01-ztmrmc MANUAL APPENDIX E
MEI.
DRAKE
DRAKE
ALINCO
RADIO
SHACK
NOTE: On all radios, the shield should go to the same place as the brown wire, unless otherwise noted
ICOM
IC-751
Pin 
Pin 
Pin 
Pin 
Pln 
Pin 
Pin 
Pin 
Pin 
Pin 10...
Pin 11
Pin 12...
Pin 13...
HADIQ
4 PIN
ElN_QI.II
WHITE 1
RED 2
BROWN 3
1/4 WHITE
STEREO RED
BROWN
ALR 206T â€˜ â€˜â€œ '
<1<
NQIES
RING
TIP
SLEEVE
a<
.. 1...â€˜
n
E
n
an
HTX 100 WHITE 1
RED 2
GREEN 6
SHIELD 7
BROWN B
Output lrom the discriminator circuit.
13.8 volts DC, switched with lrom panel power.
RED. PTT when grounded.
GREEN. Fixed level audio oul.
WHITE. Input lor mic gain control.
B volts DC when transmitting. max. 5 mA.
lnput lor extemal AGC.
BROWN & SHIELD. Ground.
FSK N. Input tor RTTY. Mark High - Space Low.
No Connection
Input lor transverter control.
Output relerence voltage tor band switching,
Output tor extemal band switching.
>4
>3
812162024
711151923
> 2 610141822
L15 9131721
/it/\
E-3
BROWN AND SHIELD TO PIN 7.
EXTERNAL SPEAKER FOR AUDIO.
Pl(88~19l

PK-88
IC-78
ACC1
OPERATING MANUAL Appgtqph 5
1 and [C761
Pin 1 RTTY In. AEA's FSK line goes here.
Pin 2......t..........BROWN & SHIELD. Ground.
Pin PTT.
Pin 4.................WHlTE. Modulator In 100 mV HMS.
Pin 5.................GFiEEN. Audio out 47K. 100 - 300 mV.
Pin 6.................Squelch low when open.
Pin  volts @1.0 amps.
Pin 
ICâ€”781 ONLY
Data in tor the CRT ..... .. Pin 1 ASCII Data In. Pin 4 Ground.
IC-735
ACC 1 (round 8 pin DIN.)
Pin 1  .... ..No Connection.
Pin 2.................BROWN 8- SHIELD. Ground.
Pin  PTT.
Pin 4.................wH|TE. Input to the modulator stage tor AFSK.
Pin 5Wl44iIi44lii444IGREENI Fixed level audiot
Pin 6..u.............SOUELCH. This goes to ground when squelch opens.
Pin  13.8 volts DC out switched by main power.
Pin 8
 Input tor external ALC.
NOTE: When required to connect BROWN and SHIELD to JMLQ pins, (i.e., ICOM 8 pin), connect
BROWN to one 01 the two pins, SHIELD to the otherot the two pins, then connect the two pins together
with a small piece oi wire.
This information has been obtained trom various sources. and AEA assumes no responsibility tor accuracy
Please consult your particular transceiver operator's manual for oontimtation.
E-4
PK88-192

APPENDIX F
Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.
PK-88 Firmware Revision Supplement
l6â€”MAYâ€”89
The following is the list of commands that are either new or have
changed since the 28â€”JUL-88 release of the PK-88 firmware.
CUSTOM 'nnnn' Mnemonic: CU Default: $0015
Mode: Packet Host: Cu
RirÃ©llï¬�iilit
"n" - 0 to $40 (0 to 64 decimal) specifies a fourâ€”digit hex
value, where each bit controls a different function.
Bit O, position $0001: If bit O is set to 1 (default setting),
then the PKâ€”88 will discard a received
packet if the signal is too weak to
cause the DCD LED to light. If set to
0, packets will be received regardless
of the setting of the DCD threshold.
Bit 1, position $0002: If bit 1 is set to 0 (default setting),
then setting the MONITOR command to
either ON or YES will result in a
MONITOR value of 4. If bit 1 is set to
1, then setting MONITOR to ON or YES
will force the MONITOR value to 6.
PBBS Sysops may want to set CUSTOM to
$0017 (23 decimal).
Bit 2, position $0004: If bit 2 is set to 1 (default setting),
a break on the RS-232 line will put
the PKâ€”88 into the Command mode
(except from Host Mode). If set to 0,
a break on the RS-232 line will not
affect the PKâ€”88.
Bit 3, position $0008: If bit 3 is set to O (default setting),
packet channel numbers will be numbered
from 0-9. If bit 3 is set to one, then
packet channel numbers are labeled Aâ€”J.
Lower case a-j are also accepted.
Bit 4, position $0010: Not used with the PK-88.
F-1

Bit 5, position $0020: If bit 5 is set to 1, then the PKâ€”88
when powered on, will stay in the last
mode it was in, i.e., converse, command,
or transparent. If bit 5 is set to 0,
(default mode) the PKâ€”88 will always
power up in the Command mode.
Bit 6, position $0040: If bit 6 is set to 1, then monitoring
is active in the transparent mode.
The MFROM, MTO, HPT, MONITOR, MCON,
MPROTO, MSTAHP, CONSTAMP, and MBX are
all active. If bit 6 is set to 0,
(default setting), then monitoring is
disabled in the transparent mode.
Bits 7-15 are all unused at the present time. To return the
CUSTOM command to the default setting, type CU Y or CU ON at
the command prompt.
A discussion describing the default settings and how the
$0015 setting was derived may assist you with understanding the
CUSTOM parameter.
The default setting for bits 0-6 is noted below:
Bit 0 is set to 1, bit 1 is set to 0, bit 2 is set to 1, bit 3 is
set to O, bit 4 is set to 1, bit 5 is set to 0, and bit 6 is set
to 0. The following chart indicates the same information.
Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
Looking at just the setting row in the chart, the binary number
00010101 becomes evident. The binary number 00010101 equals the
decimal number 21, and the hexadecimal equivalent is $0015 hence
the reason the default setting for CUSTOM is $0015.
Let us say, for example, that you have decided that as a MARS
operator you want to change bit 4 from the default of 1 to a
setting of 0. The chart below reflects this change.
Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O
Setting 0 0 0 O 0 l O 1
This results in a binary number of 00000101 which is a decimal
number 5. The hex equivalent is $0005, therefore, to change bit
position 4 to a setting of zero, leaving the others unchanged,
will require a CUSTOM setting of $0005.
The CUSTOM command will accept arguments in decimal format. For
example, the default is $0015, however if you enter decimal 21,
the PKâ€”88 will accept this. The PKâ€”88 will display on the
screen the hexadecimal equivalent.
F-2

Using lax Notation
Observe some simple rules if you choose to reassign parameter
values in hexadecimal numbers. Begin the number with a '$'. The
"digits" of a hex number represent multiples of powers of 16.
The values from 10 to 15 are represented by the letters A through
F. The letters can be typed in upper or lower case. For
example:
Decimal Number O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . .
Hex Numbers O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 . . .
$15 = (l x 16) + (11 x 1) = 27 (decimal)
RIBS ONIOFF Mnemonic: KI Default: OFF
Mode: Packet Host: KI
Parameters:
ON â€” The PKâ€”88 operates as a KISS TNC.
OFF â€” The PK-88 operates as a normal AX.2S Level 2 TNC.
Turning KISS ON now has a temporary effect on several other
parameters. KISS ON temporarily forces HPOLL OFF, PPERSIST ON,
RAWHDLC ON and HOST ON. RAWHDLC ON temporarily forces CONMODE
TRANS, TRACE OFF, HID OFF and no BEACON. HOST ON temporarily
forces BBITCONV ON, AWLEN 8, PARITY 0 and no software flow
control.
This change makes going into the KISS much easier!
To exit KISS, you must type three control C's, all within one
second. Also, no data can be received by the PK-88 during this
operation or it will not work, and you will remain in KISS mode.
HOST OFF (3 CTRL-C5) will force KISS OFF. The PK-88's CMD and
PKT LEDs will be lit, confirming exit from KISS mode.
"Temporarily forcing" a function means that the PKâ€”88 will
behave as if the function is set that way, although the function
setting does not actually change.
MBX call 1, call 2, Mnemonic: MB Default: none
Mode: Packet Host: MB
Parameters:
call â€” The call sign of one or two stations to be monitored
"n" â€” 0-15, indicating an optional SSID.
F-3

The HBX command will now accept the argument of ALL. There are
no changes in the functions of the arguments that have been
permitted previously. The operation of MBX command is as
follows.
HBX NONE (Default setting.) All monitored frames are
shown with their packet headers. See MFROM,
MTO, MONITOR, CONSTAMP, MSTAMP and MPROTO.
MBX ALL Only the data fields in the Iâ€”frames and UI
frames are shown: no headers or other types of
frames are shown. Data from retried frames
will be shown each time such a frame is
monitored. The MFROM and MTO commands are
active.
MEX CALL 1 Only the data fields in the I and UI frames to
or from CALL 1 are shown. CALL 1 can be in
either the source or destination address
field of the frame. Retried frames are not
shown. The MFROM and MTO commands are
ignored.
MEX CALL 1 CALL 2 Only the data fields in the I and UI frames
are shown when
CALL 1 is the source and CALL 2 is the
destination or,
CALL 1 is destination and CALL 2 is the
source.
Retried frames are not shown. The MFROM and
MTO commands are ignored.
A packet connection on any channel inhibits monitoring, if MBX is
not set to "none," MCON will only work if MBX is set to "none."
Fâ€”4

MID "n" Mnemonic: MI Default: O
Mode: Packet Host: Hi
Parameters:
"n" â€” O ~ 250 specifies the Morse ID timing in units of 10
second intervals.
0 (zero) disables this function.
A setting of 0 (default) disables this function. If "n" is set
to some value between l - 250, then the packet mode, the PK-88
will periodically issue a 20 wpm Morse ID. A Morse ID consists
of 0.5 seconds of idle, the call sign in MYCALL, without the
SSID, followed by 0.5 seconds of idle. For example, an MID of
177 seconds would cause a Morse ID every 1,770 seconds, or every
29.5 minutes. The Morse ID will only be issued if a packet was
sent since the last Morse ID. The Morse ID uses TXDELAY,
PPERSIST and DCD.
The ID command has now changed. If HID is ON, ID will cause the
HDLC ID to be transmitted immediately, which is the same as
before. If MID is set to a value other than 0, ID will force a
Morse ID immediately. If both HID and MID are both active, the
Morse ID will be sent first.
The PKâ€”88 generates Morse code by switching from the mark tone
to the space tone. This prevents other TNC's from accidentally
transmitting and colliding with a CW ID.
WHYNOT ON|0FF Mnemonic: WHY Default: OFF
Mode: Packet Host: WN
Parameters:
ON â€” PK-88 will generate a reason why a received packet
was not displayed to the screen.
OFF â€” This function is disabled.
During packet operation, the PKâ€”88 may receive many packets
that are not displayed to the screen. Turning WHYNOT on will
cause the PKâ€”88 to display a message explaining the reason the
received packet was not displayed to the screen.
The messages and their meanings are shown on the following page.
Fâ€”5

Bit residue:
BUFFER OVERFLOW:
FRAME TOO IDNG:
PASSALL:
DCD Threshold:
MONITOR:
MCON:
MPROTO:
MFROM/MTO:
MBX:
MBX Sequence:
RX Overrun:
The frame ended in the middle of a byte. A
weak packet signal might cause this, or, more
likely, random noise that triggered the start
of packet reception. Also, this may occur
after a genuine frame has been received.
An incoming packet overflowed an internal
buffer. Probably caused by a nonâ€”AX.25 packet.
More than 300 bytes were received in a packet
frame. Probably caused by a non-AX.25 packet.
The received packet frame had errors, and
PASSALL was off, thereby preventing the packet
from being displayed to the screen.
The Threshold control was set to far counter
clockwise. The DCD LED was off when the packet
was received.
The MONITOR value was set to low to receive
this type of frame.
MCON was set too low to receive this type of
frame.
MPROTO was set to off, and the received packet
was probably a NET/ROM or TCP/IP frame.
The frame was blocked by the setting of either
the MFROM or MTO command.
The call sign of the sending station does not
match the call sign setting in the MBX command.
The packet frame has been received out of
sequence, probably a retry.
Another HDLC byte was received before we could
read the previous one out of the HDLC chip.
The MPROTO command default is set to OFF.
F-6

APPENDIX G
ANSWERS TO COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS
AND SPECIAL NOTES TO ABA SOFTWARE USERS
(PC-PAXRATT, COM-PARRATT, AND HACRATT)
The PK-88 can be used with a multitude of computers and computer
programs. This can lead to some confusion as to how to properly
connect, access certain features and configure the
PKâ€”88. The
following questions and answers may help you without having to make
a long-distance phone call to AEA's Technical Support.
QUESTION 1. How do I connect my PK-BB to my radio?
ANSWER. The radio cable supplied with the unit is
described in
Table 2-1 on page 2-2 of the manual and in Figure 2-1 on page
2-9 of the manual. For specific radio connections, refer to
Appendix E of the manual. Always connect the shield wire (non-
insulated bare wire) to the ground wire (brown) on
unless otherwise instructed in Appendix D. If you
about your radio connections, refer to the section
operating manual describing the microphone and its
the radio end,
are unsure
in the radio's
connections.
QUESTION 2. Do I connect the green wire AND the Rx-IN audio input
to my radio?
ANSWER. No! The green wire, and the RXâ€”IN jack are the same
thing. They are directly wired together inside the PKâ€”88. You
use one OR the other. A cable is supplied with the PK-88 that
allows you to connect the RXâ€”IN jack easily. Normally, the
easiest place to get the audio from the radio is from the
EXTERNAL SPEAKER OUT if you are using the RXâ€”IN cable. Many
transceivers have other places you can get receiver audio from as
well. See Chapter 2 and Appendix E for more information about
radio connections.
QUESTION 3. I have never installed batteries, but my PK-88
appears to bold its parameters after a power down.
Ihat gives?
ANSWER â€” The newer PK-88's come with a lithium battery installed
inside the unit. Check JP-6 to see if it is OFF or ON. It uses a
small shorting plug to short the two pins of JPâ€”6 together. ON
means the shorting plug is on both pins of JP-6, and the battery
is enabled. OFF means the shorting plug is not on both pins of
JPâ€”6, and the battery is disabled.
G~l

QUESTION 4. Do I disable the lithium battery in my PK-B8, or do
I leave it enabled?
ANSWER. This depends mainly on what computer program you are
going to use. The best thing to do regardless of what program
you are using is to disable the battery until you get comfortable
with the unit. The lithium battery is explained in Appendix I.
The battery is used if you wish to save your callsign and
parameters you might change after power to the PKâ€”88 has been
turned off. If you are using a program that saves parameters to
disk, such as PCâ€”Pakratt, generally it is best to disable the
battery. This is because if the parameters conflict, the program
may appear not to work. If you are using COMâ€”Pakratt, MacRATT,
or any terminal program that does not support automatically
saving parameters to disk, you will probably want to enable the
battery so the PKâ€”88 can store parameters. This allows
parameters such as your callsign (MYCALL) to be stored in its
internal RAM even with the power OFF. The only way to change all
of your parameters back to default is to issue a RESET command
from a command prompt (cmd:), or to remove the battery power by
lifting JPâ€”6 (located near the large capacitor C27) for at least
30 seconds.
Some customers have expressed a desire to use several different
programs, but do not wish to change their parameters every time
they switch. This can be done by enabling the battery. One word
of caution is that TERMINAL BAUD RATE of all programs must match
to do this. For example, if you are using PCâ€”Pakratt at a
terminal baud rate of 4800 baud (selectable from the "Welcome To"
opening screen) and wish to go to a program such as PROCOMM ,
first exit PCâ€”Pakratt, and then bring up PROCOWM. Turn off your
PKâ€”88, and set PROCOMM to 4800 N, 8, l. Then turn on your PK-88.
You may see the message "ORT" which is explained next. Send the
PK-88 three control C's within one second, and a command prompt
will be displayed. PROCOM must be in the terminal mode for this
to work. You can now access all the commands of the PKâ€”88, but
the parameters should be the same as used by PCâ€”Pakratt.
QUESTION 5. sometimes I get the message "ORT" on my screen. what
does this mean?
ANSWER. This is the PKâ€”88 signâ€”on message in Host Mode language.
It means that when you turned off your PK-88, you were in the host
mode, and now you are trying to communicate with it in the terminal
mode. This is common if you are using the COMâ€”Pakratt program,
and have the battery enabled. You can get a command (cmdz)
prompt by sending three controlâ€”C's within one second, get a
command prompt, and take it from there. Or, if you are using
COM-Pakratt, you can turn the computer off and then back on to
get to the opening screen again. Then, instead of striking "T"
for terminal mode, strike the RETURN key to bring up the split
screen operation. with the battery enabled, the PK-88
"remembers" the parameters when you last turned it off. See
Question 3 in "SPECIAL NOTES FOR COMâ€”PAKRATT USERS."
1:2

QUESTION 6. How do I find the DATECODE and CHECKBUN of my
PRâ€”8B firmware?
ANSWER. You must always be in the terminal mode to find this.
First, whatever program you are using, escape to the terminal
mode so you are displaying a command prompt (cmdz). Now type in
the command RESTART. The PK-88 will now display the signâ€”on
message which includes the DATECODE and CHECKSUM of your
firmware. This is important information, and should be written
down on the first page of your manual in case you should have to
call for technical assistance. we will want to know what the
DATECODE and CHECKSUM of your firmware is, as well as the type
of computer and the radio being used.
QUESTION 7. My PXâ€”88 is not working â€” HELP!
ANSWER â€” First, turn to the "What If..." section on page 4-6,
section 4.4.3 of the manual. There are some good suggestions to
follow if you are having problems connecting to other packet
stations. The next step is to start at the beginning. If you
have the battery enabled, disable it, or if you are using a
terminal program, make a new working copy from the original disk.
If the problem is serious, such as all of the LED's on the front
of the PK-88 stay on, or no LED's are lit, it is best to take the
cover off and inspect your PK-88. Remove all cables and
connectors, and remove the four Phillips head screws that hold
the cover down. Carefully remove the top cover from the bottom.
If no LED's are lit, check the fuse. Take the fuse out of its
holder and check with an ohmeter. This is preferable to a visual
inspection. It should measure as a short (zero ohms). If the
fuse is bad, replace it with a one amp fuse. NEVER REPLACE THE
FUSE WITH ONE THAT IS RATED ABOVE ONE AMP! If the fuses continue
to blow, check the power cable. The tip of the power connector
should go to the positive side of the power supply. Also check
the power cable for shorts. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLE
FROM THE POWER SOURCE WHEN TESTING WITH AN OHETER.
Inspect the socketed IC chips for bentâ€”out or bentâ€”under pins.
If this looks good, then use your thumb to press down firmly on
the socketed IC's. Reâ€”install the top cover. The next thing to
check is your power supply. A common problem is that the power
supply is no longer supplying sufficient current to run the PK-88.
The PK-88 is looking for 12 volts DC UNDER LOAD and at least 500
milliamps of current with less than two volts peakâ€”to-peak of ripple
It is also a very good idea to closely inspect all interconnecting
cables, and clean any contact connections. If all else fails,
please call AEA and ask for Technical Support.
QUESTION 8. My ex-as is not keying my radio properly. What's
wrong?
ANSWER. It is possible to disable your PTT line in software.
Turn ON the parameter called XMITOK.
Gâ€”3

If this is set properly, the next thing to do is to check your
cable. The best way to do this is to unplug the Bâ€”pin connector
from the RADIO PORT on the PKâ€”88, leaving it connected to your
radio. Then hook the GROUND pin and the PTT pin together. These
are pins one and three, respectively, and are the BROWN and RED
wires. If it does not key your radio, your cable is bad, or your
radio is bad. Check MIC operation. If the microphone keys your
radio, check the configuration of the PTT jumpers inside the
PKâ€”88 for proper configuration. This is covered on page 2-8,
section 2.8.1 of the manual.
If your radio is keyed all the time, use the above procedure
starting with removing the cable. If unplugging the cable unâ€”keys
the transmitter, it is possible that the PTT transistor is shorted.
This is TR4, and is located close to the radio connector on the
PKâ€”88 PCB. Replacing TR4, and possibly TR1 and TR5 also, should
cure this problem. If it still persists, please call AEA and ask
for Technical Support.
Q NOTE I ONLY REPLACE THE TRANSISTORS IF YOU HAVE HAD PRIOR
EXPERIENCE WORKING ON DOUBLEâ€”SIDED GLASS EPOXY PCB ASSEMBLIES ! ! !
IF YOU DAMAGE THE BOARDS, YOU MAY RISK NOT BEING COVERED UNDER THE
AEA WARRANTY.
QUESTION 9. The manual is so big, I can't find what I need
quickly. Where do I look?
ANSWER. The first place to look is the TABLE OF CONTENTS in the
front of the manual. Each chapter has a title that explains
what it covers. Refer to the chapter that applies to your question
This is an excellent way to find information you require quickly.
Another approach to finding information is to refer to APPENDIX A
in the back of the manual. This covers all of the commands the
PKâ€”88 uses in alphabetical order and gives a brief description of
their function and default setting. Chapter S describes these
commands in full detail and can be an invaluable source of
information.
SPECIAL NOTES FOR PCâ€”PAKRATT USERS
l. PCâ€”Pakratt contains a file named README.DOC that includes
information and application notes that may be useful. To create
a hardcopy of this file to your printer, type the following command
at the DOS prompt followed by a carriage return:
copy readme.doc prn
You can obtain information on this file or a hardcopy by
contacting AEA's Technical Support.
2. If you wish to access parameters in the PK-88 such as
CvÃ©

CUSTOM, WHYNOT, etc., you must enter the DUMB TERMINAL mode.
This is accessed from the main menu by pressing the F8 function
key. If you try to change a parameter that already exists in the
split screen mode from the dumb terminal mode, such as MYCALL,
the split screen mode takes precedence over the dumb terminal
mode and the parameter will be set to the value chosen in split
screen mode. Always make sure you are at a command prompt (cmd:)
in the dumb terminal mode before you strike the escape key to
return to split screen mode. Failure to do so may result in a
lockâ€”up of the program, or an RS-232 Linkâ€”Error.
3. when going between PC-Pakratt and another program, after you
exit the program, and before you bring up the other, it is a good
idea to turn OFF your PK-88 for at least 10 seconds to let it
return to DEFAULT parameters (unless you are running both
programs with the same serial port parameters [see QUESTION 3]).
Default status is indicated by only the MULT LED being lit on the
front panel of the PKâ€”88 when you turn it on. Setting PCâ€”Pakratt
for 4800 baud operation at the opening screen will ease switching
between programs.
4. If you should get the message "UNABLE TO ESTABLISH
COMUNICATIONS..." etC., observe if the MULT LED is Still lit,
and also if any other LED's besides MULT were lit while it was
trying to communicate with your PKâ€”88. If the LED's did move
around while the program was running, this means the program
"saw" your PKâ€”88 but could not link up with it. Remove any
memoryâ€”resident (TSR) programs you may be using. You may also
run the command "CHKDSK" from a DOS prompt to make sure you have
over 320 KBytes of RAM free. Try another computer or serial port
If the LEDâ€™s did not move at all, this means the program
most likely did not "see" the PKâ€”B8. Check your serial cable for
proper configuration. Also check if your serial port is
configured as a DCE or a DTE. If the serial port is configured
as a DCE, you will want to swap the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE data
lines. Refer to Chapter 2, page 19, section 2.11.6 of the manual
concerning this. Chapter 2 also has some detailed connections
for specific computers starting on page 18, section 2.11. Try
another computer or serial port. If you have any other terminal
programs, bring one up and see if you can "talk" to the PKâ€”88.
If you can, make a new copy of the malfunctioning program from
the original disk and try again. Trying your PKâ€”88 on another
working system is an excellent way to find the problem also.
Please call AEA's Technical Support if problems persist.
SPECIAL NOTES FOR COM-PAKRATT USERS
1. To allow the PKâ€”88 to work with this program in the split
screen mode, a simple modification must be done to the circuit
board. To do this, simply short one end of R5 to one end of R7.
Use the end of the resistors that are closest to the outside
edge of the board (see Figure 1, page 6 of this section).
Gâ€˜5

2. Always use your keyboard overlays that came with the package!
Channel O on the top (upper) overlay lines up with the leftâ€”reading
arrow key on the computer keyboard, and Channel 1 lines up over
the "1" on the keyboard, etc. This will greatly simplify opera-
tion, and ease of use. Also, always press "C: Q" when quitting
either program in the HOST mode. All quotation marks are used
for clarification, and are NOT to be typed in.
3. There are two ways to start the program. You can press "T"
for terminal mode, or press the "RETURN" key to go directly to
HOST mode. You MUST turn it ON the way you turned it OFF, if you
have the battery enabled. If you turned it off in the terminal
mode, first press "T", and then turn on the PK-88. If you turned
it off in the split screen mode using "c=Q", you must have your
PKâ€”8B powered on, and then press "RETURN" at the opening screen.
Both procedures are done presuming you have your computer ON with
either cartridge installed and the main menu is being displayed.
Also refer to question 4 in "COWMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS."
SPECIAL NOTES FOR MACRATT USERS
1. To allow the PKâ€”88 to work with this program in the split
screen mode, a simple modification must be done to the circuit
board. To do this, simply short one end of R5 to one end of R7.
Use the end of the resistors that are closest to the outside
edge of the board (see Figure 1 below).
2. Be sure to enable the battery in your PKâ€”88 before you load
MaoRATT for the first time. Then, after doing the procedure
outlined in chapter 3 of the MacRATT manual once ("Getting
Started with the PKâ€”87/PK-88") loading the program next time will
be much easier, because the PKâ€”88 "remembers" the parameters for
MacRATT. The next time you enter the program, make sure the PK-
BB is already on, and everything will set up automatically.
â€˜ â€”_' f)
.\'<:ri:\1 Purl (I0|\m>cLux' .
.Â¢ l
_-â€”;' .- *2 JÂ» -
JP5 ; 8%â€œ 5
;, " We 1
_ _ ,, Q _
2- Â®
.
0 + @
0 $1 H
I 0
3' - : > 0| o 0
J. N -
T Â°Z
<.. l â€˜I 0
_ u
F-,_ QQ _+ 1 2.._.
*PROCOMâ€˜M is 8 registered trademark Of DATASTORM TECHNOIDGIES, INC.
iga ___ ___ pr
L
___ ___ ._ï¬‚ï¬‚ ma
\./ \_/ 2
1 Z51 Q Bl Â¢
HN9 â€˜
-"""' Ow 3
â€˜L HPE3
93773
(â€˜I
5
n
9'94 4Â» 5Â° 4Â»
4Â» O,
an
4Â» an
so v
za
C-6

APPENDIX K
NET/ROMâ€˜ MODIFICATION FOR THE PKâ€”88
To install the NET/ROM firmware into your PKâ€”88, the simple
modification described in the following steps must be done for
proper operation.
NOTE: Because the PK-88 is not a TNC-2 clone, TheNET* firmware
(and other firmware designed for TNC-2 clones) will ggt work in
the PK-88. The main reasons are: 1) The TNC-2 uses hardware
dip switches for selecting baud rates, whereas the PK-88 baud
rates are software selectable; and 2) The SCC chip in the PKâ€”88
is a Z8530, while the TNC-2 uses a Z8440 (which are not
compatible).
The modification is done in three steps. First, move JP-7 to
position B. This jumper is located in the front left corner of
the circuit board, between IC2l and IC22 (Figure 1, below).
Position B means that the small plug is on the center pin and the
pin closest to the outside edge of the PCB. Secondly, solder-
jump the two halves of JPâ€”8 together, and do the same for JP-9.
These are actually lands on the circuit board, and they are
located near the serial port (Figure 2, below). Finally, touch a
wellâ€”grounded metal object in your shack to discharge any static
you may have built up in your fingers, and, using a small flat-
bladed screwdriver, gingerly remove the firmware chip (ICl5) from
its socket, being careful not to pry the socket from the board
itself. Once this is done, simply install the NET/ROM chip into
the empty socket, making sure the notch on the EPROM points
towards the rear of the PKâ€”88.
Your PKâ€”88 is now a NET/ROM node!
â€˜ .c., ,.,,, *1Â»;-.5â€˜ PK- as Â° l1.'Z:,â€˜.',Tâ€˜,.'.â€™I.".â€˜1Â§â€œâ€˜
um
Â§< 1:
D M __
,, _ . . r. 0 D,
Uâ€œ l-lgure 1 Mgure .1 __u? -Q.-â€˜Â° ",3
M, Â¢,. 4, my 3(1) I-'ronL Pmml Roar Punc-
:l â€œ:1 W .
â€œ(B
uu >00â€œ "%Â¢,,,, c Â°
| It ~- -= 
-11 E
WW
nu
cw
-"' en -"- 1:7â€˜; B
,5 --
:: :2: aim: r.
#NET/ROM is a registered trademark of Software 2000
*TheNET is a registered trademark of <NORDâ€”LINK>
Hâ€”l

APPENDIX I
LITHIUM BATTERY IN THE PK-88
Your PKâ€”88 has a lithium battery installed onto the printed
circuit board just behind the heatsink, at the BTâ€”1 location (see
Figure 1, below). This battery replaces the two AA batteries
used in earlier PKâ€”B8's. To electrically remove the battery from
the PKâ€”88 circuitry, leave JPâ€”6 disconnected. If you wish to
install the battery into the circuit, place the jumper over both
pins of JP-6. Your PKâ€”88 has been shipped to you with the battery
disconnected from the circuit. In general, if you are using AEA's
IBM program PCâ€”Pakratt with FAX, you will want to leave the
battery out of the circuit. With COM-Pakratt, MacRATT, or any
other terminal program, you will want to install the jumper over
both pins of JPâ€”6.
---wA1mn|o---
Do NOT dispose of lithium batteries in a fire.
Do NOT short the two leads of a lithium battery together.
Note battery polarity if ever installing a lithium battery.
Q 1051,1000 WARD/ASA
PK-88 AH .,.,..,. ....,...1
m C;
*@
0| RRâ€™
" '"' D1 8 nos _
-m? Q4 |c|
I  \
+ . W
| _ 010 _ _
: C Q A |c2 us : 2 Â§Â§-- .. 5
1
i |
o o
Ff F
-e
5 8
J.
Y
.._Â¢Â¢_aa
-- _
_,M_
,~, u
1.
'6
+
1,2 no
1 ï¬�ï¬‚
0 0
GO
=
-0- 2
E4
-4Â¢_
_.,,,_
n5-w-
ns-w-
111-4/w-
ng-aw-
"Â°â€œâ€œ.??.'
~=4? .~=
.=. Q
5--IP0 clo 4,, - no
ca -it cs '4'" 75159 ms
an
RI
WU
an
|c.1 no
:12Â»
cu -0-
G
â€”-wÂ»-
-qA--
_~M._
â€˜W  ueso
"NC 7511!! nÂ§\_~M_| C5
U
. . nnuï¬�i
I-1

LEA
Advanced Electronic Applications, Inc.
PK-B8 MANUAL
040-341 Rev D 3/90